HP Compaq nc8430 Maintenance And Service Manual
Main tenan ce and Ser vice Gu id e HP C om paq n w8 44 0 No tebook P C HP C ompaq nc8 4 30 Notebook P C HP C ompaq nx8 4 20 Notebook P C Doc ument P art Number : 4177 9 0 -001 June 2006 This guide is a troubleshooting reference used for maintaining and servicing the computer . It provides comprehensi v e information on identifying computer features, components, and spare parts; troubleshooting computer problems; and performing computer disassembly procedures.
© Copyright 2006 He wlett-Packard Dev elopment Company , L.P . Microsoft and W indows are U.S. re gistered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. Intel and Core are tradem arks or registered trademarks of Intel Corporation or its subsidiaries in the United States and other countries. Bluetooth is a trademark o wned by its proprietor and used b y He wlett-Packard Compan y under license. SD Logo is a trademark of its proprietor . Jav a is a trademark of Sun Microsystems Inc. The information contained herein is su bject to change without notice. The only warranties for HP products and services are set forth in the express warranty statements accompan ying such products and services. Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty . HP shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein. Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide HP Compaq n w8440 Not ebook PC HP Co mpaq nc84 30 Notebook P C HP Co mpaq nx84 20 Notebook P C F irst E dition: June 2006 Document P ar t Nu mber : 4177 90 -001
Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide iii Cont e nt s 1 Product Description 1.1 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1â2 1.2 Resetting the Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1â4 1.3 Power Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1â5 1.4 External Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1â6 1.5 Design Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1â20 2 Troubleshooting 2.1 Computer Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2â1 Using Computer Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2â1 Selecting from the File Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2â2 Selecting from the Security Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2â3 Selecting from the Advanced Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2â4 Selecting from the Tools Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2â4 2.2 Troubleshooting Flowcharts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2â5
i v Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide Cont en ts 3 Illustrated Parts Catalog 3.1 Serial Number Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3â1 3.2 Computer Major Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3â2 3.3 Plastics Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3â16 3.4 Mass Storage Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3â18 3.5 Miscellaneous (Not Illustrated) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3â20 3.6 Sequential Part Number Listing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3â22 4 Removal and Replacement Preliminaries 4.1 Tools Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4â1 4.2 Service Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4â2 Plastic Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4â2 Cables and Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4â2 4.3 Preventing Damage to Removable Drives . . . . . . . . 4â3 4.4 Preventing Electrostatic Damage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4â4 4.5 Packaging and Transporting Precautions . . . . . . . . . 4â5 4.6 Workstation Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4â6 4.7 Grounding Equipment and Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4â7
Cont en ts Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide v 5 Removal and Replacement Procedures 5.1 Serial Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5â2 5.2 Disassembly Sequence Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5â3 5.3 Preparing the Computer for Disassembly . . . . . . . . . 5â5 5.4 Hard Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5â6 5.5 Computer Feet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5â10 5.6 Optical Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5â11 5.7 External Memory Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5â13 5.8 Bluetooth Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5â16 5.9 Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5â18 5.10 Fan Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5â23 5.11 Heat Sink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5â28 5.12 Processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5â31 5.13 Internal Memory Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5â33 5.14 RTC Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5â35 5.15 TouchPad. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5â36 5.16 Mini Card Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5â39 5.17 Switch Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5â42 5.18 Display Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5â45 5.19 Top Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5â49 5.20 Modem Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5â53 5.21 System Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5â55 5.22 System Board Frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5â62 5.23 Serial Connector Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5â65 5.24 USB/Audio Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5â67
v i Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide Cont en ts 6 Specifications A Screw Listing B Software Backup and Recovery C Display Component Recycling D Connector Pin Assignments E Power Cord Set Requirements Index
Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 1â1 1 Pr oduc t D esc ription The HP Compaq nw8440 Notebook PC, HP Compaq nc8430 Notebook PC, and HP Compaq nx8420 Notebook PC of fer adv anced modularity , Intel® Core⢠Duo processors, and extensi ve multimedia support. HP Compaq n w8440 Not ebook P C, HP Co mpaq nc84 30 Notebook P C, and HP Compaq nx8 4 20 Notebook PC
1â2 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Product D escr ipt ion 1.1 F e a t u r e s â The follo wing processors, v a rying b y computer model: â Intel Core Duo T2600 (2.17-GHz) â Intel Core Duo T2500 (2.00-GHz) â Intel Core Duo T2400 (1.83-GHz) â Intel Core Duo T2300 (1.66-GHz) â The follo wing displays are a v ailable, v arying by computer model: â 15.4-inch, WUXGA, TFT (1920 à 1200) with ov er 16.8 million colors with AntiGlare â 15.4-inch, WSXGA, TFT (1680 à 1050) with ov er 16.8 million colors with AntiGlare â 15.4-inch, WXGA , TFT (1440 à 900) with ov er 16.8 million colors with AntiGlare â 120-, 100-, 80-, and 60-GB high-capacity hard dri ve, v arying by computer model â 256-MB DDR2 synchronous DRAM (SDRAM) at 533 MHz and 667 MHz, expandable to 4.0 GB â Microsoft® W indo ws® XP Professional â Full-size W indo ws ke yboard with numeric ke ypad â T ouchPad and pointing stick pointing de vices, including a dedicated vertical scroll re gion (select models only) â Integrated 10 Base-T/100 Base-TX Ethernet local area network (LAN) netw ork interface card (NIC) with RJ-45 jack â Integrated high-speed 56K modem with RJ-11 jack
Product D escr ipt ion Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 1â3 â Integrated wireless support for Mini Card IEEE 802.11a/b/g or 802.11b/g W ireless LAN (WLAN) de vice â Support for one T ype I or T ype II PC Card slot, with support for both 32-bit (CardBus) and 16-bit PC Cards, v arying by computer model â External 90-watt A C adapter with 3-wire po wer cord â 8-cell Li-Ion battery â Stereo speakers â V olume up, v olume mute, and v olume do wn b uttons â Support for the follo wing optical dri v es: â D VD±R W and CD-R W Double-Layer Combo Driv e â D VD/CD-R W Combo Dri v e â D VD-R OM driv e â Connectors: â Accessory battery â Audio-in (microphone) â Audio-out (headphone) â Digital media slot â Docking connector â External monitor â IEEE 1394 â RJ-11 (modem) â RJ-45 (network) â S-V ideo-out â Smart Adapter po wer â Three Uni v ersal Serial Bus (USB) v . 2.0
1â4 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Product D escr ipt ion 1 .2 R eset tin g t he Com pu ter If the computer you are servicing has an unkno wn password, follo w the steps belo w to reset the password. These steps also clear CMOS. â The follo wing steps will not clear an unkno wn password if the stringent security option has been enabled in the BIOS. If stringent security is enabled, the system board must be replaced to reset an unkno wn password. Refer to Section 5.23, âSerial Connector Module, â for more information on replacing the system board. Before replacing the system board, perform the steps belo w to make sure stringent security has been properly enabled. Enabling stringent security provides enhanced protection for the po wer -on password and administrator password and other forms of po wer -on authorization. Stringent security is enabled/disabled by accessing the P a ssword Options menu in the Computer Setup utility . Refer to Section 2.1, âComputer Setup, â for more information. 1. Prepare the computer for disassembly (refer to Section 5.3, âPreparing the Computer for Disassembly , â for more information). Remov e the real-time clock (R TC) battery (refer to Section 5.14, âR TC Battery , â for more information on removing and replacing the R TC battery). 2. W ait approximately 5 minutes. 3. Replace the R TC battery and reassemble the computer . 4. Connect A C power to the computer . Do not reinsert an y batteries at this time. 5. T urn on the computer . All passwords and all CMOS settings ha v e been cleared.
Product D escr ipt ion Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 1â5 1. 3 P o w e r M a n a g e m e n t The computer comes with po wer management features that extend battery operating time and conserv e power . The computer supports the follo wing po wer management features: â Standby â Hibernation â Setting customization by the user â Hotke ys for setting the le ve l of performance â Battery calibration â Lid switch standby/resume â Po wer b utton â Adv anced Conf iguration and Po wer Management (A CPM) compliance
1â6 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Product D escr ipt ion 1 .4 Ex ternal C ompon ents The external components on the front of the computer are sho wn belo w and described in T able 1-1. F r ont Component s Ta b l e 1 - 1 Fr ont Components Item Component Function 1 Wireless light On: An integrat ed wireless de vice, such as a wireless local area network (LAN) device and/or a Bluetooth® de vice, is turned on. 2P o w e r l i g h t â On: The computer is on. â Blinking: The computer is in standby . â Blinking rapidly: An HP Smar t A C Adapter with a higher pow er rating should be connected. â Off: The computer is o ff or in hiber nation.
Product D escr ipt ion Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 1â7 3 Batter y light â Amber : A batter y is charging. â Green: A batter y is close to full charge capacity . â Blinking amber : A batter y that is the only av ailable po wer source has reached a low-battery condition. When the batter y reaches a critical lo w-batter y condition, the batter y light begins blinking more quickly . â Off: If the computer is connected to an e xter nal po wer source, the light is turned off when all batteries in the computer are fully charged. If the computer is not connected to an e xternal power source , the light is tur ned off until the battery reaches a low-battery condition. 4D r i v e l i g h t â Blinking green: The hard driv e or optical drive is being accessed. â Amber : HP Mobile Data Protection has temporarily par k ed the hard drive. 5 Displa y release latch Opens the computer . Ta b l e 1 - 1 Fr ont Components (Continued) Item Component Function
1â8 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Product D escr ipt ion The external components on the right side of the computer are sho wn belo w and described in T able 1-2. R igh t -Si de Com ponents Ta b l e 1 - 2 Right-Side Components Item Component Function 1A u d i o - o u t (headphone) jack Produces computer sound when connected to optional pow er stereo speakers , headphones, ear b uds, a headset, or tele vision audio . 2 Inter nal microphone Records sound 3A u d i o - i n (microphone) jack Connects an optional computer headset microphone, stereo arr a y microphone, or monaural microphone . 4 USB por ts (2) Connect USB 1.1- and 2.0-compliant de vices to the computer using a standard USB cable , or connect an optional Exter nal MultiBa y II to the computer . The MultiBa y II must also be connected to an e x ternal pow er source. 5 Optical drive Suppor ts an opti cal disc. The type of optical drive v ar ies by model. 6 Serial por t Connects an optional serial device .
Product D escr ipt ion Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 1â9 The external components on the rear panel of the computer are sho wn belo w and described in T able 1-3. Re ar P a ne l Co mp o n en t s T able 1-3 Rear P anel Components Item Component Function 1 Batter y ba y Holds a batter y . 2 Smar t adapter power connector Connects an A C adap ter or an optional pow er adapter . 3 Exter nal monitor por t Connects an optional V GA e xter nal monitor or projector .
1â10 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Product D escr ipt ion The external components on the left side of the computer are sho wn belo w and described in T able 1-4. Left -Side Components Ta b l e 1 - 4 Left-Side Components Item Component Function 1 Security cable slot Attaches an op tional security cable to the computer . Ã Security solutions are designed to act as deterrents. These deterrents ma y not pre v ent a product from being mishandled or stolen. 2 RJ-45 (network) jack Connects an optional network cable . 3 RJ-11 (modem) jack Conn ects the modem cable . 4 S-Video-out jack Connects an optional S-Video de vice, such as a tele vision, VCR, camcorder , projector , or video capture card.
Product D escr ipt ion Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 1â11 5 Exhaust v ent Pro vides airflow to cool internal components. à T o pre v ent ov erheating, do not obstruct vents . Use the computer only a hard, flat surf ace. Do not allo w a hard surf ace, such as an adjoining printer , or a soft surf ace , such as pillows or thic k r ugs or clothing, to blo ck ai r fl ow . 6 1394 por t Connects an optional 1394a de vice such as a scanner , digital camera, or digital camcorder . 7 USB por t Connects USB 1.1- and 2.0-compliant de vices to the computer using a standard USB cable , or connects an optional Exter nal MultiBa y II to the computer . The MultiBa y II must also be connected to an e xter nal pow er source . 8 Smar t card slot Suppor ts op tional smar t cards and Ja v a⢠Cards. 9 PC Card slot Suppor ts optional T ype I or T ype II 32-bit (CardBus) or 16-bit PC Cards. 10 Digital Media Slot Suppor ts Secure Digital (SD) Memor y Cards and MultiMediaCards. Ta b l e 1 - 4 Left-Side Components (Continued) Item Component Function
1â12 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Product D escr ipt ion The standard ke yboard components of the computer are sho wn belo w and described in T able 1-5. St andar d K ey board C ompone nts
Product D escr ipt ion Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 1â13 T able 1-5 Standar d Ke yboar d Components Item Component Function 1 f1 to f12 ke ys (12) P erf orm system and application tasks. When combined with the fn key , s ever al ke ys and buttons perf or m additional tasks as hotk eys . 2 caps lock ke y Enables caps loc k and turns on the caps loc k light. 3 fn ke y Ex ecutes frequently used system functions when pressed in combination with a function ke y or the esc key . 4 Windows logo k e y In Window s , displa ys the Windows Star t menu. 5W i n d o w s applications ke y In Windows , displa ys a shor tcut menu f or items beneath the pointer . 6 Arrow k e ys Mov es the cursor around the screen. 7 K eypad k eys In Windows , can be used lik e the ke ys on an e xter nal numeric k eypad. 8 num lock ke y Enables n umeric lock, tur ns on the embedded numeric ke ypad, and tur ns on the num loc k light.
1â14 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Product D escr ipt ion The computer top components are sho wn belo w and described in T able 1-6. T op Components , P ar t 1
Product D escr ipt ion Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 1â15 T able 1-6 T op Components Item Component Function 1 P ower b utton When the computer is: â Off , press to turn on the computer . â On, briefly press to initiate hiber nation. â In standb y , briefly press to resume from standby . â In hiber nation, briefly press to restore from hiber nation. If the system has st opped responding and Windows shutdo wn procedures cannot be used, press and hold f or 5 seconds to tur n off the computer . 2 Inf o Center b utton Launches In f o Center , which enables y ou to open v arious software solutions. 3 Wireless button (with wireless light) T ur ns the wireless functionality on or off , but does not create a wireless connection. â To establish a wireless connection, a wireless network must already be set up. 4 Presentation button Star ts the presentation feature . 5 Caps lock light On: caps lock is on. 6 Num loc k light On: num lock or the numeric ke ypad is on. 7 V olume mute b utton Mutes or restores speaker v olume. 8 V olume down b utton decreases speaker v olume. 9 V olume up button Increases speaker v olume.
1â16 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Product D escr ipt ion The computer top components are sho wn belo w and described in T able 1-7. T op Components , P ar t 2
Product D escr ipt ion Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 1â17 T able 1-7 T op Components Item Component Function 1 Displa y lid s witch â If the computer is closed while on, tur ns off the displa y . â If the computer is opened while in standby , tur ns on the computer (resumes from standby). 2 P ointing stick (select models only) Mov es the pointer and selects or activates items on the screen. 3 Stereo speakers (2) P roduce stereo sound. 4 T ouchP ad Mov es the pointer and selects or activates items on the screen. Ca n be set to perf orm other mouse functions, such as scrolling, selecting, and double-clic king. 5 T ouchP ad buttons Function like the left, middle , and right buttons on an e xter nal mouse. 6 Finger print reader Allo ws a finger print logon to Windows instead of using a pass word. 7 T ouchP ad scroll zone Scrolls up or down. 8 P ointing stick b uttons (select models only) Function lik e the le ft, middle, and right buttons on an e xter nal mouse.
1â18 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Product D escr ipt ion The external components on the bottom of the computer are sho wn belo w and described in T able 1-8. Bot tom Component s
Product D escr ipt ion Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 1â19 Ta b l e 1 - 8 Bottom Components Item Component Function 1 Batter y ba y Holds the batter y . 2 Batter y release latches (2) Secur e the batter y in the batter y ba y . 3 Accessor y batter y connector Connects an optional HP Ultra-Capacity Batter y or HP Extended Lif e Batter y . 4 Memor y module compar tment Contains one memor y slot that suppor ts replaceable memory modules. 5 Hard drive ba y Holds the primar y hard dr iv e. 6 Doc king connector Connects the computer to an optional doc king de vice. 7 Exhaust v ent Provides airflo w to cool internal components. Ã T o pre v ent ov erheating, do not obstruct vents . Use the computer only a hard, flat surf ace. Do not allow a hard surf ace, such as an adjoining printer , or a soft surf ace, such as pillo ws or thic k rugs or clothing, to bloc k airflow .
1â20 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Product D escr ipt ion 1. 5 D e s i g n O v e r v i e w This section presents a design ov erview of k ey parts and features of the computer . Refer to Chapter 3, âIllustrated Parts Catalog, â to identify replacement parts, and Chapter 5, âRemo v al and Replacement Procedures, â for disassembly steps. The system board provides the follo wing device connections: â Audio â Digital Media Slot â Display â Hard dri v e â Intel Core Duo processors â K e yboard, pointing stick, and T ouchP ad â Memory modules â Mini Card module â Optical dri v e â PC Card â Smart Adapter A C adapter â Smart card à CA UTION: T o pr operl y ventilate the com puter , allo w at least a 7 .6 -cm (3-inc h) c lear ance on the left and r igh t sides o f the comput er . The computer uses an electric fan for v e ntilation. The fan is controlled by a temperature sensor and is designed to turn on automatically when high temperature conditions exist. These conditions are af fected b y high external temperatures, system po wer consumption, po wer management/battery conserv ation conf igurations, battery fast char gi ng, and software. Exhaust air is displaced through the ventilation grill located on the left side of the computer .
Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 2â1 2 T r oubl eshooting à W ARN ING: Only author iz ed tec hnic ians tr ained b y HP should r epair this equipmen t . All tr ouble shooting and r epair pr ocedur es ar e detailed to allo w onl y subass embly-/module-lev el r epair . Becaus e of the comple x ity of the indi v idual boar ds and subas sembli es , do not attempt to mak e repair s at the component le vel or modif ications to an y print ed w ir ing boar d. Im pr oper r epairs can c r eate a safety ha z ard . An y indicati on of component r eplacement or pr inted w iring boar d modif icati on may v oid an y war r anty or ex c hange allo wance s. 2. 1 C omp uter Setu p Computer Setup is a system information and customization utility that can be used e ven when the operating system is not w orking or will not load. This utility includes settings that are not a v ailable in W indow s. Using C ompu ter Setup Information and settings in Computer Setup are accessed from the Main, Security , Adv anced, or T ools menus: 1. T urn on or restart the computer . Press f10 while the F10 = R OM-Based Setup message is displayed in the lo wer -left corner of the screen. â T o change the language, use the cursor control keys to na vigate to the Adv anced menu. â T o view na vigation information, press f1 . â T o return to the Computer Setup menu, press esc .
2â2 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de T r oublesh ooting 2. Select the Main , Security , Advanced , or T ools menu. 3. T o close Computer Setup and restart the computer: â Select Exit > Exit Sa ving Changes , and then press enter . â or â â Select Exit > Exit Discarding Changes , and then press enter . â or â â Select Exit > Load Setup Defaults, and then press enter . 4. When you are prompted to conf irm your action, press f10 . Sele c ti ng fr om the F ile Menu Ta b l e 2 - 1 File Menu Select T o Do This System Inf or mation â Change the system time and system date. â Vie w identification inf or mation about the computer . â Vie w specification inf or mation about the processor , memor y and cache size , and system ROM.
T r oubleshooting Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 2â3 Selec ting fr om t he Securit y Menu Ta b l e 2 - 2 Security Menu Select T o Do This Administrator P ass word Enter , chan ge, or delete an Administr ator pass word. P ower-on P ass word Enter , change, or delete a pow er-on pass word. DriveLoc k P ass words Enable/disab le Dr iveLoc k; change a Dr iv eLock user or master pass word. â DriveLock Settings are accessible only when you enter Comput er Setup by turning on (not restarting) the computer. P assw ord Options (P assw ord options can be selected only when a pow er-on pass word has been set.) Enable/disab le â QuickLoc k. â QuickLoc k on Standby . â QuickBlank. â To enable QuickLock on Standby or QuickBlank, you must first enable QuickLock. De vice Security Enable/disab le â Diskette driv e star tup.* â CD-ROM or disk ette star tup . â Settings for a DVD-ROM can be entered in the CD-ROM field. *Not applicable to SuperDisk LS-120 driv es.
2â4 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de T r oublesh ooting Selec ting from th e Ad v an ced Menu Selec ting fr om t he T ools Menu Ta b l e 2 - 3 Adv anced Menu Select T o Do This Language Change the Comp uter Setup language. Boot Order Enable/disab le Mult iBoot, which sets a star tup sequence that can includ e most bootab le de vices and media in the system. Accessibility Options Allows electron ic and inf or mation technolog y to be accessib le to people with varying ranges of abilities. Video Memor y Displa ys the amount of video memor y a vailab le on the computer . Ta b l e 2 - 4 To o l s M e n u Select T o Do This Hard Drive Self T est Run a quic k co mprehensiv e self test on hard drives in the system that suppor t the test f eatures.
T r oubleshooting Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 2â5 2.2 T roubl eshooting Flo wc h ar ts Ta b l e 2 - 5 T roubleshooting Flo wch ar ts Overview Flowchart Description 2.1 âFlowchar t 2.1âInitial T roub leshootingâ 2.2 âFlowchar t 2.2âNo P ow er , P ar t 1â 2.3 âFlowchar t 2.3âNo P ow er , P ar t 2â 2.4 âFlowchar t 2.4âNo P ow er , P ar t 3â 2.5 âFlowchar t 2.5âNo P ow er , P ar t 4â 2.6 âFlowchar t 2.6âNo Video , P ar t 1â 2.7 âFlowchar t 2.7âNo Video , P ar t 2â 2.8 âFlowchar t 2.8âNonfunctioning Do c king De vice (if applicab le)â 2.9 âFlowchar t 2.9âNo Operating System (OS) Loadingâ 2.10 âFlowchar t 2.10âNo OS Loading, Hard Drive , P ar t 1â 2.11 âFlowchar t 2.11âNo OS Loading, Hard Drive , P ar t 2â 2.12 âFlowchar t 2.12âNo OS Loading, Hard Drive , P ar t 3â 2.13 âFlowchar t 2.13âNo OS Loading, Disk ette Dr iv eâ
2â6 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de T r oublesh ooting Flowchart Description 2.14 âFlowchar t 2.14âNo OS Loading, Optical Driveâ 2.15 âFlowchar t 2.15âNo A udio , P ar t 1â 2.16 âFlowchar t 2.16âNo A udio , P ar t 2â 2.17 âFlowchar t 2.17âNonfunctioning De viceâ 2.18 âFlowchar t 2.18âNonfunctioning K eyboardâ 2.19 âFlowchar t 2.19âNonfunctioning P ointing De viceâ 2.20 âFlowchar t 2.20âNo Network/Modem Connectionâ Ta b l e 2 - 5 T roubleshooting Flo wcharts Overview (Continued)
T r oubleshooting Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 2â7 Flo wc h art 2. 1âInitial T roub leshooting Connecting to network or modem? Begin troubleshooting. Is there power? Is the OS loading? Is there video? (no boot) Is there sound? Beeps, LEDs, or error messages? Keyboard/ pointing device working? Go to âFlowchar t 2.17âNonfunc- tioning De vice. â Go to âFlowchar t 2.2âNo P ower , Pa r t 1 . â Go to âFlowchar t 2.6âNo Video , Pa r t 1 . â All drives working? Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y N N N N N End N N N Go to âFlowchar t 2.9âNo Operating System (OS) Loading. â Go to âFlowchar t 2.15âNo A udio , Pa r t 1 . â Go to âFlowchart 2.18âNonfunc- tioning K e yboardâ or âFlowchart 2.19âNonfunc- tioning P ointing De vice. â Check LED board, speaker connections. Go to âFlowchar t 2.20âNo Network/Modem Connection. â
2â8 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de T r oublesh ooting Flo wc h art 2.2âN o P o w er , P ar t 1 1. Reset the power cables in the docking device and at the AC outlet. 2. Be sure the AC power source is active. 3. Be sure that the power strip is working. Done Remove from docking device (if applicable). Po we r u p on batter y power? Po we r u p on AC power? Power up in docking device? Po we r up on batter y power? Po we r u p in docking device? Done Reset power .* Reset power .* Po we r u p on AC power? N Y Y N N Y N N Y Y YN 1. On select models, there is a separate reset button. 2. On select models, th e computer can be reset using the standby switch and either the lid switch or the main power s witch. *NOTES Go to âFlowchart 2.4âNo P ower , Pa r t 3 . â Go to âFlowchar t 2.3âNo P ower , Pa r t 2 . â Go to âFlowchar t 2.8âNonfunctioning Docking De vice (if applicable). â No power (power LED is off).
T r oubleshooting Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 2â9 Flo wc h art 2.3âNo P o w er , P ar t 2 Continued from âFlowchar t 2.2âNo P ower , Pa r t 1 . â Visually check for debris in batter y socket and cl ean if necessary . Done N Y Po we r o n ? Check batter y by recharging it, moving it to another computer , or replacing it. Po we r o n ? Done Y Replace power supply (if applicable). N Po we r o n ? Done Y N Go to âFlowchart 2.4âNo P ower , Pa r t 3 . â
2â10 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de T r oublesh ooting Flo wc h art 2.4âN o P o w er , P ar t 3 Continued from âFlowchart 2.3âNo P ower , Pa r t 2 . â Reseat AC adapter in computer and at po wer sou rc e. Internal or external AC adapter? Done Done Done Done Po we r o n ? Po we r o n ? Po we r o n ? Plug directly into AC outlet. Po we r L E D on? Po we r o u tl et active? T r y different outlet. Replace external AC adapter . Replace power cord. Y N Y Y Y Y N N N N External Internal Go to âFlowchar t 2.5âNo P ower , Pa r t 4 . â
T r oubleshooting Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 2â11 Flowc ha r t 2.5 âN o P o w er , P a rt 4 Y N Continued from âFlowchar t 2.4âNo P ower , Pa r t 3 . â Reseat loose components and boards and replace damaged items. Open computer . Loose or damaged parts? Y Close computer and retest. Po we r on ? Done N Replace the following items (if applicable). Check computer operation after each replacement: 1. Internal DC-DC converter* 2. Internal AC adapter 3. Processor board* 4. System board* *NOTE: Replace these items as a set to prevent shorting out among components.
2â12 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de T r oublesh ooting Flo wc h art 2.6âN o Video, P ar t 1 A N Stand-alone or docking device? No video. Replace the following one at a time. T est after each replacement. 1. Cable between computer and computer display (if applicable) 2. Display 3. System board Internal or external display*? Adjust brightness. Video OK? Done Docking Device Internal Stand-alone External Adjust brightness. Video OK? Done Y Press lid swi tc h to en su re operation. Video OK? Done Y N Video OK? Done Done N Check for bent pins on cable. Tr y another display . Internal and external video OK? Replace system board. YY N N *NOTE: T o change from internal to external display , use the hotkey combination. Y Go to âFlowchar t 2.7âNo Video , Pa r t 2 . â
T r oubleshooting Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 2â13 Flo wc h art 2.7âN o Video, P ar t 2 Y N Continued from âFlowchart 2.6âNo Video , Pa r t 1 . â Done Adjust external monitor display . Video OK? Adjust display brightness. Video OK? Video OK? Done Done Check that computer is properly seated in docking device, for bent pins on cable, and for monitor connection. Go to âA â in âFlowchart 2.6âNo Video , Pa r t 1 . â Check brightness of external monitor . T r y another external monitor . Internal and external video OK? Go to âFlowchar t 2.8âNonfunctioning Docking De vice (if applicable). â Y Y Y N N N Remove computer from docking device, if connected.
2â14 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de T r oublesh ooting F lo wch a rt 2 .8 â No nf un ct i o n in g D ock i ng De v ic e (i f appl icable) Y N Reset power cord in docking device and power outlet. N T est replacement docking device with new computer . Check voltage setting on docking device. Reset monitor cable connector at docking device. Reinstall computer into docking device. Docking device operating? Docking device operating? Replace docking device. Done Done Y Nonfunctioning docking device.
T r oubleshooting Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 2â15 Flo wc h art 2.9âN o Opera ting S y s tem (OS) Loadin g No OS loading from hard drive, go to âFlowchart 2.10âNo OS Loading, Hard Drive , P ar t 1. â Reset power cord in docking device and power outlet. No OS loading.* *NOTE: Before beginning troubleshooting, always check cable connections, cable ends, and drives for bent or damaged pins. No OS loading from diskette drive, go to âFlowchart 2.13âNo OS Loading, Diskette Driv e. â No OS loading from CD-ROM or DVD-ROM drive, go to âFlowchar t 2.14âNo OS Loading, Optical Drive. â No OS loading from network, go to âFlowchar t 2.20âNo Network/Modem Connection. â
2â16 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de T r oublesh ooting Flo wc h art 2. 1 0âN o OS Loadin g , Hard Driv e, Pa r t 1 Go to âFlowchart 2.17âNonfunctioning De vice. â Y Done N OS not loading from hard drive. Nonsystem disk message? Go to âFlowchar t 2.11âNo OS Loading, Hard Drive, P ar t 2. â Reseat external hard drive. OS loading? Done Boot from CD? Go to âFlowchar t 2.13âNo OS Loading, Diskette Driv e. â Boot from hard drive? Boot from diskette? Change boot priority through the Setup Utility and reboot. Boot from hard drive? Y Y Y Y Y N N N N N Check the Setup utility for correct booting order .
T r oubleshooting Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 2â17 Flowc h ar t 2. 1 1âN o OS L oa di ng , H ard Drive, Pa r t 2 Load OS using Operating System disc (if applicable). Continued from âFlowchar t 2.10âNo OS Loading, Hard Drive, P ar t 1. â Reseat hard drive. Done CD or diskette in drive? 1. Replace hard drive. 2. Replace system board. Go to âFlowchar t 2.13âNo OS Loading, Diskette Driv e. â Format hard drive and bring to ab o o t a b l e C:\ prompt. Create partition, and then format hard drive to bootable C:\ prompt. Boot from diskette drive? Remove diskette and reboot. Y N Boot from hard drive? Y N Y N Hard drive accessible? Y N Hard drive accessible? Done Run FDISK. Y N Hard drive partitioned? Hard drive formatted? Y N Y N Computer booted? Done Y N Go to âFlowchart 2.12âNo OS Loading, Hard Drive, P ar t 3. â Go to âFlowchar t 2.12âNo OS Loading, Hard Drive , P ar t 3. â
2â18 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de T r oublesh ooting Flo wc h art 2. 1 2âNo OS Loadin g, H ard Driv e, Pa r t 3 Y System files on hard drive? Continued from âFlowchar t 2.11âNo OS Loading, Hard Drive, P ar t 2. â Clean virus. Done N Install OS and reboot. Virus on hard drive? OS loading from hard drive? Y N Y N Y N Diagnostics on diskette? Replace hard drive. Run diagnostics and follow recommendations. Run SCANDISK and check for bad sectors. Can bad sectors be fixed? Replace hard drive. Y N Y N Fix ba d sectors. Boot from hard drive? Replace hard drive. Done
T r oubleshooting Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 2â19 Flo wc h art 2. 1 3âNo OS Loadin g , Disk et te Driv e Done Y N Reseat diskette drive. OS not loading from diskette drive. Done Y Y Y Y Y Y Y N N N N N N N OS loading? Nonsystem disk message? Bootable diskette in drive? Install bootable diskette and reboot computer . Check diskette for system files. Tr y d i f f e r e n t diskette. 1. Replace diskette drive. 2. Replace system board. Nonsystem disk error? OS loading? Boot from another device? Enable drive and cold boot computer . Is diskette drive boot order correct? Change boot priority using the Setup Utility . Go to âFlowchar t 2.17âNonfunc- tioning De vice. â Diskette drive enabled in the Setup Utility? Go to âFlowchart 2.17âNonfunctioning De vice. â Reset the computer . Refer to Section 1.2, âResetting the Computer , â for instructions.
2â20 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de T r oublesh ooting Flo wc h art 2. 1 4âNo OS Load ing , Opti cal Driv e Y Done N Bootable disc in drive? Disc in drive? No OS loading from CD-ROM or DVD-ROM drive. Install bootable disc and reboot computer . Go to âFlowchar t 2.17âNonfunctioning De vice. â Go to âFlowchar t 2.17âNonfunctioning De vice. â Install bootable disc. Boots from CD or DVD? Boots from CD or DVD? T r y another bootable disc. Booting from another device? Booting order correct? Correct boot order using the Setup Utility . Done Reseat drive. Y Y Y Y Y N N N N N Reset the computer . Refer to Section 1.2, âResetting the Computer , â for instructions.
T r oubleshooting Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 2â21 Flo wc h art 2. 1 5âNo Au dio, P ar t 1 No audio. N Computer in docking device (if applicable)? Internal audio? Audio? Done Undock Audio? Done T urn up audio internally or externally . Go to âFlowchar t 2.16âNo A udio , Pa r t 2 . â Go to âFlowchar t 2.17âNonfunctioning De vice. â Y Y Y Y N N N Go to âFlowchar t 2.16âNo A udio , Pa r t 2 . â Replace the docking device.
2â2 2 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de T r oublesh ooting Flo wc h art 2. 1 6âNo Audio, P ar t 2 YN Continued from âFlowchart 2.15âNo A udio , Pa r t 1 . â Reload audio drivers. Audio driver in OS configured? Audio? Y Y Y N N N Correct drivers for application? Connect to external speaker . Load drivers and set configuration in OS. Audio? Done Replace audio board and speaker connections in computer (if applicable). 1. Replace internal speakers. 2. Replace audio board (if applicable). 3. Replace system board.
T r oubleshooting Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 2â2 3 Flo wc h art 2. 1 7âNonfun c tioning De vice Done Any physical device detected? Y N Unplug the nonfunctioning device from the computer and inspect cables and plugs for bent or broken pins or other damage. Reseat device. Clear CMOS. Done Fix o r replace broken item. Nonfunctioning device. Reattach device. Close computer , plug in power , and reboot. Device boots properly? Go to âFlowchart 2.9âNo Operating System (OS) Loading. â Device boots properly? Replace hard drive. Replace diskette drive. Replace NIC. If integrated NIC, replace system board. Y N Y N
2â2 4 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de T r oublesh ooting Flo wc h art 2. 1 8âNonfunc tionin g K e yboar d Y N OK? Keyboard not operating properly . External device works? Replace system board. Replace system board. Connect computer to good external keyboard. Reseat internal keyboard connector (if applicable). Replace internal keyboard or cable. OK? Y N Y N Done Done
T r oubleshooting Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 2â2 5 Flo wc h art 2. 1 9âN onfunc tioning P oin ting De vic e Y N OK? Pointing device not operating properly . External device works? Replace system board. Replace system board. Connect computer to good external pointing device. Reseat internal pointing device connector (if applicable). Replace internal pointing device or cable. OK? Y N Y N Done Done
2â2 6 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de T r oublesh ooting Flo wc har t 2.20âNo N et w ork/Modem Con nectio n Y Disconnect all power from the computer and open. No network or modem connection. N Done Digital line? Network or modem jack active? Replace jack or have jack activated. Connect to nondigital line. NIC/modem configured in OS? Reload drivers and reconfigure. Reseat NIC/modem (if applicable). Replace the NIC/modem (if applicable). Replace system board. OK? OK? Done N N N N Y Y Y Y
Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 3â1 3 I llus trated P ar ts C a talog This chapter provides an illustrated parts breakdo wn and a reference for spare part numbers. 3. 1 S erial N umber Location When ordering parts or requesting information, provide the computer serial number and model number located on the bottom of the computer . Ser ial Number L ocation
3â2 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Illustr ated P ar ts Cat alog 3.2 Comp uter M ajor Com ponen ts Com pu te r M ajor Components
Illustr ated P arts Catalog Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 3â3 Ta b l e 3 - 1 Spare P ar ts: Computer Major Components Item Description Spare P art Number 1 Display assemb lies (include wireless antenna transceiv ers and cab les) 15.4-inch, WUXGA 15.4-inch, WSXGA 15.4-inch, WXGA 416413-001 416412-001 416411-001 2 Switch co vers (include LED board and LED board cab le) F or use with nw8440 and nc8430 models F or use with nx8420 models 416405-001 416406-001 3 Ke yboar ds K eyboard with pointing stic k (inc ludes ke yboard and pointing stick cab les) for use in: Belgium Brazil The Czech Repub lic Denmark Fr a n c e F rench Canada Ger many Greece Hungar y Iceland Inter nationally Israel Italy Ja pa n Ko r e a Latin America 416416-A41 416416-201 416416-221 416416-081 416416-051 416416-121 416416-041 416416-151 416416-211 416416-DD1 416416-B31 416416-BB1 416416-061 416416-291 416416-AD1 416416-161 Norwa y P or tugal Russia Saudi Arabia Slov akia Slov enia Spain Sweden Switzerland Ta i w a n Thailand Tu r k e y The United Kingdom The United States 416416-091 416416-131 416416-251 416416-171 416416-231 416416-BA1 416416-071 416416-101 416416-111 416416-AB1 416416-281 416416-141 416416-031 416416-001
3â4 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Illustr ated P ar ts Cat alog Com pu te r M ajor Components
Illustr ated P arts Catalog Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 3â5 Ta b l e 3 - 1 Spare P ar ts: Computer Major Components (Continued) Item Description Spare P art Number 3 Ke yboar ds (Continued) K eyboard without pointing stic k (inc ludes ke yboard cable) f or use in: Belgium Brazil The Czech Repub lic Denmark Fr a n c e F rench Canada Ger many Greece Hungar y Iceland Inter nationally Israel Italy Ja pa n Ko r e a Latin America 416417-A41 416417-201 416417-221 416417-081 416417-051 416417-121 416417-041 416417-151 416417-211 416417-DD1 416417-B31 416417-BB1 416417-061 416417-291 416417-AD1 416417-161 Norwa y P or tugal Russia Saudi Arabia Slov akia Slov enia Spain Sweden Switzerland Ta i w a n Thailand Tu r k e y The United Kingdom The United States 416417-091 416417-131 416417-251 416417-171 416417-231 416417-BA1 416417-071 416417-101 416417-111 416417-AB1 416417-281 416417-141 416417-031 416417-001 4 T ouchP ads With 3 T ouchP ad buttons With 2 T ouchP ad buttons 382675-001 382676-001
3â6 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Illustr ated P ar ts Cat alog Com pu te r M ajor Components
Illustr ated P arts Catalog Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 3â7 Ta b l e 3 - 1 Spare P ar ts: Computer Major Components (Continued) Item Description Spare P art Number 5 T op cover s (include speak ers) F or use with nw8440 models with finger print reader F or use with nw8440 models without finger print reader F or use with nc8430 and nx820 models with finger print reader F or use with nc8430 and nx8420 models without finger print reader 418807-001 416401-001 416403-001 416042-001 Fingerprint reader board with cab le (not illustrated) 416400-001 Plastics Kit 416420-001 6a 6b 6c 6d Includes: PC Card slot space sav er Bluetooth module cov er Memor y module cov er (includes 3 captive scre ws) Hard drive co ver (includes 2 captiv e screws) Not illustrated: computer f eet (7) 7 Fa n assembly 416409-001 8 Heat sink (includes ther mal paste) 416408-001 9 Thermal plate 416410-001 10 Processor s (include ther mal paste) Intel Core Duo T2600 (2.16-GHz) processor Intel Core Duo T2500 (2.00-GHz) processor Intel Core Duo T2400 (1.83-GHz) processor Intel Core Duo T2300 (1.67-GHz) processor 413686-001 413685-001 413684-001 413683-001
3â8 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Illustr ated P ar ts Cat alog Com pu te r M ajor Components
Illustr ated P arts Catalog Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 3â9 Ta b l e 3 - 1 Spare P ar ts: Computer Major Components (Continued) Item Description Spare P art Number 11 Mini Car d modules 802.11b/g HS WLAN module f or use in Nor th Amer ica 407253-001 802.11b/g HS WLAN module f or use in the countries listed below . These countr ies are categor ized as the rest of the world (RO W). 407253-002 China Ecuador Haiti Honduras P akistan Pe r u Qatar South K orea Uruguay V enezuela 802.11b/g HS WLAN module f or use in J apan 407253-291 802.11b/g LJ WLAN module f or use in Nor th America 407254-001 802.11b/g LJ WLAN modu le f or use in the R O W countries listed below . 407254-002 China Ecuador Haiti Honduras P akistan Pe r u Qatar South K orea Uruguay V enezuela 802.11b/g LJ WLAN module f or use in J apan 407254-291 802.11a/b/g GL WLAN module f or use in the countries listed below . These countrie s are categor ized as most of the world (MO W 1). 407575-001 Antigua & Barb uda Argentina A ustralia Bahamas Barbados Brunei Canada Chile Dominican Repub lic Guam Guatemala Hong K ong Pa n a m a India Indonesia Mala ysia Me xico New Zealand Pa r a g u a y Saudi Arabia Ta i w a n The United States Vietnam
3â10 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Illustr ated P ar ts Cat alog Com pu te r M ajor Components
Illustr ated P arts Catalog Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 3â11 Ta b l e 3 - 1 Spare P ar ts: Computer Major Components (Continued) Item Description Spare P art Number 11 Mini Car d modules (Continued) 802.11a/b/g GL WLAN module f or use in the countries listed below . These countrie s are categor ized as most of the world (MO W 2). 407575-002 Aruba A ustria Azerbaijan Bahrain Belgium Ber muda Bulgaria Ca yman Islands Columbia Croatia Cyprus Czech Repub lic Denmark Eg ypt El Salv ador Estonia Finland Fr a n c e Georgia Ger many Greece Hungar y Iceland Ireland Italy Latvia Lebanon The Philippines Po l a n d P or tugal Romania Russia Serbia and Montenegro Singapore Slov akia Liechtenstein Lithuania Lux embourg Malta Monaco The Netherlands Norwa y Oman Slov enia South Africa Spain Sri Lanka Sweden Switzerland Tu r k e y The United Kingdom Uzbekistan 802.11a/b/g GL WLAN module f or use in the R O W countries listed below . 407575-003 China Ecuador Haiti Honduras P akistan Pe r u Qatar South K orea Uruguay V enezuela 802.11a/b/g GL WLAN module f or use in Japan 407575-291
3â12 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Illustr ated P ar ts Cat alog Com pu te r M ajor Components
Illustr ated P arts Catalog Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 3â13 Ta b l e 3 - 1 Spare P ar ts: Computer Major Components (Continued) Item Description Spare P art Number 12 System board (includes R TC batter y and 256-MB of video memor y) 416397-001 13 Memory modules , 1-DIMM PC2-5300 2048-MB 1024-MB 512-MB 256-MB 417506-001 414046-001 414045-001 414044-001 PC2-4200 2048-MB 1024-MB 512-MB 256-MB 417505-001 414042-001 414041-001 414040-001 14 Modem module 413691-001 15 System board frame 416407-001 16 Serial connector module and cable 416399-001 17 Optical drives 8X Max D VD±RW and CD-R W Double-La yer Combo Drive 4X Max D VD±RW and CD-R W Double-La yer Combo Drive 24X Max D VD/CD-R W Combo Drive 8X Max D VD-ROM drive 413702-001 413700-001 413701-001 413699-001 18 USB/audio board (includes USB board cab le and audio board cable) 416398-001 19 Base enclosure 416404-001 20 Bluetooth® module (includes Bluetooth module cable) 398393-001
3â14 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Illustr ated P ar ts Cat alog Com pu te r M ajor Components
Illustr ated P arts Catalog Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 3â15 Ta b l e 3 - 1 Spare P ar ts: Computer Major Components (Continued) Item Description Spare P art Number 21 8-cell, 4.8-AH battery pack 372771-001 22 Hard drives 7200 r pm 100-GB 80-GB 416415-001 417507-001 5400 r pm 120-GB 100-GB 80-GB 60-GB 416414-001 413853-001 413852-001 413851-001
3â16 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Illustr ated P ar ts Cat alog 3. 3 Plas tic s Kit
Illustr ated P arts Catalog Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 3â17 T able 3-2 Plastics Kit Spare P ar t Number Information Item Description Spare P art Number Plastics Kit Includes: 417527-001 1 Memory module compar tment cov e r (includes 1 captive scre w , captured by C clip) 2 Bluetooth module co v er (includes 1 captiv e screw , captured by C clip) 3 Computer f eet (8) 4 PC Card slot bez el 5 Hard driv e cov er (includes 2 capt ive scre ws, captured b y C clips)
3â18 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Illustr ated P ar ts Cat alog 3.4 M a s s St ora g e D e vi ces
Illustr ated P arts Catalog Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 3â19 Ta b l e 3 - 3 Mass Storage Devices Spare P ar t Number Information Item Description Spare P art Number 1 Hard drives (include fr ame and connector) 7200 r pm 100-GB 80-GB 416415-001 417507-001 5400 r pm 120-GB 100-GB 80-GB 60-GB 416414-001 413853-001 413852-001 413851-001 2 Optical drives (include bezel) 8X Max D VD±RW and CD-R W Double-La yer Combo Drive 4X Max D VD±RW and CD-R W Double-La yer Combo Drive 24X Max D VD/CD-R W Combo Drive 8X Max D VD-ROM drive 413702-001 413700-001 413701-001 413699-001
3â20 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Illustr ated P ar ts Cat alog 3.5 Miscell aneous (N ot I llustra ted) Ta b l e 3 - 4 Miscellaneous (Not Illustrated) Spare P ar t Information Description Spare P art Number 90-watt A C adapter 416421-021 External MultiBa y II 366143-001 External MultiBa y II power cable and stand 366144-001 HP Extended Life Battery 367456-001 HP Doc king Station 413267-001 HP Doc king Station Miscellaneous Plastics Kit 380089-001 Devices f or use in External MultiBa y II and HP Docking Station 2X Max D VD±RW and CD-R W Double-La y er Combo Dr iv e 375557-001 5400-r pm, 80-GB hard drive 375198-001 MultiBa y 8X D VD-ROM Drive 373314-001 MultiBa y 24X D VD/CD-RW Combo Driv e 373315-001 USB diskette drive 359118-001 Nylon carrying case 325815-002
Illustr ated P arts Catalog Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 3â21 P ower cords: F or use in the United States 246959-001 F or use in A ustralia 246959-011 F or use in Europe, the Middle East, and Afri ca 246959-021 F or use in the United Kingdom 246959-031 F or use in Italy 246959-061 F or use in Denmark 246959-081 F or use in Brazil 246959-201 F or use in Japan 246959-291 F or use in K orea 246959-AD1 F or use in Switzerland 246959-A G1 F or use in Israel 246959-BB1 Screw Kit (includes the f ollowing screw s; ref er to Appendix A, âScrew Listing, â f or more inf orm ation on specifications and usage) 416419-001 â Phillips PM3.0Ã3.0 screw â Phillips PM2.5Ã13.0 spring-loaded scre w â Phillips PM2.5Ã7.0 screw â Phillips PM2.5Ã5.0 screw â Phillips PM2.5Ã4.0 screw â Phillips PM2.5Ã3.0 screw â Phillips PM2.0Ã8.0 screw â Phillips PM2.0Ã5.0 screw â Phillips PM2.0Ã4.0 screw â Phillips PM2.0Ã3.0 screw â Phillips PM2.0Ã2.0 screw â Phillips PM1.5Ã3.0 screw â T orx8 TM2.5Ã10.0 scre w â T orx8 T8M2.5Ã6.0 scre w â T orx8 T8M2.5Ã4.0 scre w â He x HM5.0Ã12.0 screw loc k â Rubber scre w cov ers Ta b l e 3 - 4 Miscellaneous (Not Illustrated) Spare P ar t Information (Continued) Description Spare P art Number
3â2 2 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Illustr ated P ar ts Cat alog 3.6 Sequ enti al P ar t Number Lis ting Ta b l e 3 - 5 Sequential P ar t Number Listing Spare P art Number Description 246959-001 P ower cord f or use in the United States 246959-011 P ower cord f or use in Au stralia 246959-021 P ower cord f or use in Eu rope, the Middle East, and Africa 246959-031 P ower cord f or use in the United Kingdom 246959-061 P ower cord f or use in Italy 246959-081 P ower cord f or use in Denmar k 246959-201 P ower cord f or use in Brazil 246959-291 P ower cord f or use in Japan 246959-AD1 P ower cord f or use in K orea 246959-A G1 P ower cord f or use in Switzerland 246959-BB1 P ower cord f or use in Israel 325815-002 Nylon carr ying case 359118-001 USB diskette driv e 366143-001 Exter nal MultiBa y II 366144-001 Exter nal MultiBa y II pow er cab le and stand 367456-001 HP Extended Lif e Batter y 372771-001 8-cell, 4.8-AH batter y pack 373314-001 MultiBa y 8X D VD-ROM Driv e f or use in Exter nal MultiBa y II and HP Docking Station 373315-001 MultiBa y 24X D VD/CD-RW Combo Drive f or use in Exter nal MultiBa y II and HP Doc king Station
Illustr ated P arts Catalog Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 3â2 3 375198-001 5400-r pm, 80-GB hard drive f o r use in Exter nal MultiBay II and HP Dock ing Station 375557-001 2X Max D VD±RW and CD-R W Double-La yer Combo Drive f or use in Exter nal MultiBa y II and HP Doc king Station 380089-001 HP Docking Station Miscellaneous Plastics Kit 382675-001 T ouchP ad with 3 T ouchP ad buttons 382676-001 T ouchP ad with 2 T ouchP ad buttons 398393-001 Bluetooth module (i ncludes Bluetooth module cable) 407253-001 802.11b/g HS WLAN mo dule fo r use in Nor th Amer ica 407253-002 802.11b/g HS WLAN Mini Card module f or use in the RO W countries listed below: China Ecuador Haiti Honduras Pa k i s t a n Pe r u Qatar South K orea Uruguay V enezuela 407253-291 802.11b/g HS WLAN module f or use in Japan 407254-001 802.11b/g LJ WLAN m odule f or use in Nor th Amer ica 407254-002 802.11b/g LJ WLAN modu le f or use in the R O W countries listed below: China Ecuador Haiti Honduras Pa k i s t a n Pe r u Qatar South K orea Uruguay V enezuela 407254-291 802.11b/g LJ WLAN module f or use in J apan Ta b l e 3 - 5 Sequential P art Number Listing (Continued) Spare P art Number Description
3â2 4 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Illustr ated P ar ts Cat alog 407575-001 802.11a/b/g GL WLAN modu le f or use in the MO W1 countries listed below: Antigua & Barb uda Argentina A ustralia Bahamas Barbados Brunei Canada Chile Dominican Repub lic Guam Guatemala Hong K ong Pa n a m a India Indonesia Mala ysia Me xico Ne w Zealand Pa r a g u a y Saudi Arabia Ta i w a n The United States Vietnam 407575-002 802.11a/b/g GL WLAN modu le f or use in the MO W2 countries listed below: Aruba A ustria Azerbaijan Bahrain Belgium Ber muda Bulgaria Ca yman Islands Columbia Croatia Cyprus Czech Repub lic Denmark Eg ypt El Salv ador Estonia Finland Fr a n c e Georgia Ger man y Greece Hungar y Iceland Ireland Italy Latvia Lebanon The Philippines Po l a n d P or tugal Romania Russia Serbia and Montenegro Singapore Slov akia Liechtenstein Lithuania Lux embourg Malta Monaco The Netherlands Norwa y Oman Slov enia South Africa Spain Sri Lanka Sweden Switzerland Tu r k e y The United Kingdom Uzbekistan Ta b l e 3 - 5 Sequential P art Number Listing (Continued) Spare P art Number Description
Illustr ated P arts Catalog Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 3â2 5 407575-003 802.11a/b/g GL WLAN modu le f or use in the R O W countries listed below: China Ecuador Haiti Honduras Pa k i s t a n Pe r u Qatar South K orea Uruguay V enezuela 407575-291 802.11a/b/g GL WLAN module for use in J a pan 413267-001 HP Docking Station 413683-001 Intel Core Duo T2300 (1.67-GHz) processor (includes ther mal paste) 413684-001 Intel Core Duo T2400 (1.83-GHz) processor (includes ther mal paste) 413685-001 Intel Core Duo T2500 (2.00-GHz) processor (includes ther mal paste) 413686-001 Intel Core DuoT2600 (2.17-GHz) processor (includes ther mal paste) 413691-001 Modem module 413699-001 8X Max D VD-ROM drive 413700-001 4X Max D VD±RW and CD-R W Double-La yer Combo Drive 413701-001 24X Max D VD/CD-RW Combo Driv e 413702-001 8X Max D VD±RW and CD-R W Double-La yer Combo Drive 413851-001 5400-r pm, 60-GB hard drive 413852-001 5400-r pm, 80-GB hard drive 413853-001 5400-r pm, 100-GB hard drive 414040-001 1-DIMM, PC2-4200 256 MB memor y module 414041-001 1-DIMM, PC2-4200, 512 MB memor y module Ta b l e 3 - 5 Sequential P art Number Listing (Continued) Spare P art Number Description
3â2 6 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Illustr ated P ar ts Cat alog 414042-001 1-DIMM, PC2-4200 , 1024 MB memor y module 414044-001 1-DIMM, PC2-5300, 256 MB memor y module 414045-001 1-DIMM, PC2-5300, 512 MB memor y module 414046-001 1-DIMM, PC2-5300 , 1024 MB memor y module 416042-001 T op cov er for use with nc8430 and nx8420 models with finger print reader (includes speakers) 416397-001 System board (include s R TC batter y and 256 MB of video memor y) 416398-001 USB/audio board (include s USB board cabl e and audio board cable) 416399-001 Serial connector module and cable 416400-001 Finger print reader board and cable 416401-001 T op cov er for use with nw8440 models with fingerpr int reader (includes speakers) 416402-001 T op cov er for use with nc8430 and nx8420 models without finger print reader (includes speakers) 416404-001 Base enclosure 416405-001 Switch cov er for use wi th nw8440 and nc8430 models (includes LED board and LED board cab le) 416406-001 Switch cov er for use with nx8420 models (includes LED board and LED board cable) 416407-001 System board frame 416408-001 Heat sink (i ncludes ther mal paste) 416409-001 F an assembly 416410-001 Ther mal plate Ta b l e 3 - 5 Sequential P art Number Listing (Continued) Spare P art Number Description
Illustr ated P arts Catalog Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 3â2 7 416411-001 15.4-inch, WXGA displa y assembly (includes wireless antenna transceiv ers and cab les) 416412-001 15.4-inch, WSXGA disp la y assembly (includes wireless antenna transceiv ers and cab les) 416413-001 15.4-inch, WUXGA disp lay assemb ly (includes wireless antenna transceiv ers and cab les) 416414-001 5400-r pm, 120-GB hard drive 416415-001 7200-r pm, 100-GB hard drive 416416-001 K eyboard with pointing st ick f or use in the United States 416416-031 K eyboard with pointing st ick f or use in the United Kingdom 416416-041 K eyboard with pointi ng stic k f or use in Ger many 416416-051 K eyboard with pointi ng stic k f or use in F rance 416416-061 K eyboard with poin ting stic k f or use in Italy 416416-071 K eyboard with pointi ng stic k f or use in Spain 416416-081 K eyboard with pointi ng stic k f or use in Denmark 416416-091 K eyboard with pointi ng stic k f or use in Norwa y 416416-101 K eyboard with pointi ng stic k f or use in Sweden 416416-111 K eyboard with pointing stic k f or use in Switzerland 416416-121 K eyboard with pointing stick f or use in F rench Canada 416416-131 K eyboard with pointi ng stic k f or use in P or tugal 416416-141 K eyboard with pointi ng stic k f or use in T urke y 416416-151 K eyboard with pointi ng stic k f or use in Greece 416416-161 K eyboard with pointing stick f or use in Latin Amer ica 416416-171 K eyboard with pointing stic k f or use in Saudi Arabia Ta b l e 3 - 5 Sequential P art Number Listing (Continued) Spare P art Number Description
3â2 8 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Illustr ated P ar ts Cat alog 416416-201 K eyboard with pointi ng stic k f or use in Brazil 416416-211 K eyboard with pointi ng stic k f or use in Hungar y 416416-221 K eyboard with pointing st ick f or use in the Czech Repub lic 416416-231 K eyboard with pointi ng stic k f or use in Slov akia 416416-251 K eyboard with pointi ng stic k f or use in Russia 416416-281 K eyboard with pointi ng stic k f or use in Thailand 416416-291 K eyboard with pointi ng stic k f or use in J apan 416416-AB1 K eyboard with pointi ng stic k f or use in T aiw an 416416-AD1 K eyboard with pointi ng stic k f or use in K orea 416416-B31 K eyboard with pointing stic k for use internationally 416416-BA1 K eyboard with pointi ng stic k f or use in Slov enia 416416-BB1 K eyboard with pointi ng stic k f or use in Israel 416416-DD1 K eyboard with pointi ng stic k f or use in Iceland 416417-001 K eyboard without pointing stic k f or use in the United States 416417-031 K eyboard without pointing stic k f or use in the United Kingdom 416417-041 K eyboard without pointing stic k f or use in Ger many 416417-051 K eyboard without pointing stic k f or use in F rance 416417-061 K eyboard without poin ting stick f or use in Italy 416417-071 K eyboard without pointing stic k f or use in Spain 416417-081 K eyboard without pointi ng stic k f or use in Denmark 416417-091 K eyboard without pointing stic k f or use in Norwa y 416417-101 K eyboard without pointing stic k f or use in Sweden Ta b l e 3 - 5 Sequential P art Number Listing (Continued) Spare P art Number Description
Illustr ated P arts Catalog Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 3â29 416417-111 K eyboard without pointing stic k f or use in Switzerland 416417-121 K eyboard without pointing stic k f or use in F rench Canada 416417-131 K eyboard without pointing stic k f or use in P or tugal 416417-141 K eyboard without pointing stic k f or use in T urke y 416417-151 K eyboard without poin ting stick f or use in Greece 416417-161 K eyboard without pointing stic k f or use in Latin America 416417-171 K eyboard without pointing stic k f or use in Saudi Arabia 416417-201 K eyboard without pointing stic k f or use in Brazil 416417-211 K eyboard without pointing stic k f or use in Hungar y 416417-221 K eyboard without pointing stic k f or use in the Czech Repub lic 416417-231 K eyboard without pointing stic k f or use in Slov akia 416417-251 K eyboard without pointing stic k f or use in Russia 416417-281 K eyboard without pointi ng stic k fo r use in Thailand 416417-291 K eyboard without pointing stic k f or use in Japan 416417-AB1 K eyboard without pointing stic k f or use in T aiwan 416417-AD1 K eyboard without pointing stic k f or use in K orea 416417-B31 K eyboard without pointi ng stic k for use internationally 416417-BA1 K eyboard without pointing stic k f or use in Slov enia 416417-BB1 K eyboard without pointing stic k f or use in Israel 416417-DD1 K eyboard without pointi ng stic k f or use in Iceland 416419-001 Screw Kit 416420-001 Plastics Kit Ta b l e 3 - 5 Sequential P art Number Listing (Continued) Spare P art Number Description
3â30 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Illustr ated P ar ts Cat alog 416421-001 90-watt A C adapter 417505-001 1-DIMM, PC2-4200 , 2048 MB memor y module 417506-001 1-DIMM, PC2-5300 , 2048 MB memor y module 417507-001 7200-r pm, 80-GB hard drive 418807-001 T op cov er for use with nw8440 models without fingerpr int reader (includes speakers) Ta b l e 3 - 5 Sequential P art Number Listing (Continued) Spare P art Number Description
Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 4â1 4 Remo v al an d Repl acem ent Preliminaries This chapter provides essential information for proper and safe remov al and replacement service. 4. 1 T ools Required Y ou will need the follo wing tools to complete the remov al and replacement procedures: â Magnetic scre wdri ver â Phillips P0 and P1 scre wdri vers â T orx8 screwdri ver â Flat-bladed scre wdri v er â Hex 5.0-mm sock et dri ve for system board scre w locks
4â2 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Re mo val and R e placemen t Pr eliminar ies 4.2 Ser vice C onsidera tions The follo wing sections include some of the considerations that you should keep in mind during disassembly and assembly procedures. â As you remov e each subassembly from the computer , place the subassembly (and all accompanying scre ws) away from the work area to pre vent damage. Pl a s t i c P a r t s Using excessi ve force during disassembly and reassembly can damage plastic parts. Use care when handling the plastic parts. Apply pressure only at the points designated in the maintenance instructions. C abl es and Conn ec tors à CA UTION: When se rvi c ing the compute r , be sure that cables ar e placed in their pr oper locations dur ing the reas sembl y pr ocess . Impr oper cable placement can damage the compu ter . Cables must be handled with extreme care to a void damage. Apply only the tension required to unseat or seat the cables during remov al and insertion. Handle cables by the connector whene ver possible. In all cases, a void bending, twisting, or tearing cables. Be sure the cables are routed in such a way that they cannot be caught or snagged b y parts being remo ved or replaced. Handle flex cables w ith e xtreme care; these cables tear easily .
R emo val and R eplacement Pr eliminar ie s Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 4â3 4. 3 Pr e v ent ing Da mage t o R emo v able D ri v es Remov able dri ves are fragile components that must be handled with care. T o pre vent damage to the computer , damage to a remov able dri ve, or loss of information, observ e the follo wing precautions: â Before removing or inserting a hard dri ve, shut do wn the computer . If you are unsure whether the computer is off or in hibernation, turn the computer on, and then shut it do wn through the operating system. â Before removing a disk ette dri v e or optical dri ve, be sure that a diskette or disc is not in the dri ve and be sure that the optical dri ve tray is closed. â Before handling a dri ve, be sure that you are dischar ged of static electricity . While handling a dri ve, a void touching the connector . â Handle dri ves on surf aces co vered with at least one inch of shock-proof foam. â A v oid dropping dri v es from any height onto an y surface. â After removing a hard dri ve, an optical dri ve, or a diskette dri ve, place it in a static-proof bag. â A v oid exposing a hard dri ve to products that ha v e magnetic f ields, such as monitors or speakers. â A v oid exposing a dri ve to temperature e xtremes or liquids. â If a dri ve must be mailed, place the dri ve in a b ubble pack mailer or other suitable form of protecti ve packaging and label the package âFRA GILE: Handle W ith Care. â
4â4 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Re mo val and R e placemen t Pr eliminar ies 4.4 Pr e v entin g Elec trosta tic Dam ag e Many electronic components are sensiti ve to electrostatic dischar ge (ESD). Circuitry design and structure determine the degree of sensiti vity . Networks b uilt into man y integrated circuits provide some protection, b ut in many cases, the dischar ge contains enough po wer to alter de vice parameters or melt silicon junctions. A sudden dischar ge of static electricity from a finger or other conductor can destroy static-sensiti ve de vices or microcircuitry . Often the spark is neither felt nor heard, b ut damage occurs. An electronic de vice e xposed to electrostatic discharge might not be af fected at all and can work perfectly throughout a normal cycle. Or the de vice might function normally for a while, then degrade in the internal layers, reducing its life e xpectancy .
R emo val and R eplacement Pr eliminar ie s Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 4â5 4.5 P ac k a ging an d T rans por ting Precautions Use the follo wing grounding precautions when packaging and transporting equipment: â T o av oid hand contact, transport products in static-safe containers, such as tubes, bags, or boxes. â Protect all electrostatic-sensiti ve parts and assemblies with conducti ve or appro ved containers or packaging. â K eep electrostatic-sensiti v e parts in their containers until the parts arri ve at static-free w orkstations. â Place items on a grounded surface before remo ving items from their containers. â Alw ays be properly grounded when touching a sensiti ve component or assembly . â Store reusable electrostatic-sensiti ve parts from assemblies in protecti ve packaging or nonconducti ve foam. â Use transporters and con ve yors made of antistatic belts and roller b ushings. Be sure that mechanized equipment used for moving materials is wired to ground and that proper materials are selected to a v oid static charging. When grounding is not possible, use an ionizer to dissipate electric charges.
4â6 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Re mo val and R e placemen t Pr eliminar ies 4.6 W orkstation Precau tions Use the follo wing grounding precautions at workstations: â Cov er the workstation with approv ed static-shielding material (refer to T a ble 4-2, âStatic-Shielding Materialsâ ). â Use a wrist strap connected to a properly grounded work surface and use properly grounded tools and equipment. â Use conducti ve f ield service tools, such as cutters, scre wdri vers, and v acuums. â When f ixtures must directly contact dissipati ve surf aces, use f ixtures made only of static-safe materials. â K eep the work area free of nonconducti ve materials, such as ordinary plastic assembly aids and Styrofoam. â Handle electrostatic-sensiti ve components, parts, and assemblies by the case or PCM laminate. Handle these items only at static-free workstations. â A v oid contact with pins, leads, or circuitry . â T urn of f po wer and input signals before inserting or removing connectors or test equipment.
R emo val and R eplacement Pr eliminar ie s Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 4â7 4.7 Groundin g Eq uip ment an d Methods Grounding equipment must include either a wrist strap or a foot strap at a grounded workstation. â When seated, wear a wrist strap connected to a grounded system. Wrist straps are flexible straps with a minimum of one megohm ±10% resistance in the ground cords. T o provide proper ground, wear a strap snugly against the skin at all times. On grounded mats with banana-plug connectors, use alligator clips to connect a wrist strap. â When standing, use foot straps and a grounded floor mat. Foot straps (heel, toe, or boot straps) can be used at standing workstations and are compatible with most types of shoes or boots. On conducti ve floors or dissipati ve floor mats, use foot straps on both feet with a minimum of one megohm resistance between the operator and ground. T o be effecti ve, the conducti ve strips must be w o rn in contact with the skin. Other grounding equipment recommended for use in pre v enting electrostatic damage includes â Antistatic tape. â Antistatic smocks, aprons, and slee ve protectors. â Conducti ve bins and other assembly or soldering aids. â Nonconducti ve foam. â Conducti ve tabletop w orkstations with ground cords of one megohm resistance. â Static-dissipati ve tables or floor mats with hard ties to the ground. â Field service kits. â Static aw areness labels. â Material-handling packages. â Nonconducti ve plastic bags, tubes, or box es. â Metal tote boxes. â Electrostatic v oltage le vels and protecti ve materials.
4â8 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Re mo val and R e placemen t Pr eliminar ies T able 4-1 shows ho w humidity affects the electrostatic v oltage le ve ls generated by dif ferent activities. T able 4-2 lists the shielding protection provided by antistatic bags and floor mats. Ta b l e 4 - 1 T ypical Electrostatic V olta ge Levels Relative Humidity Event 10% 40% 55% W alking across car pet 35,000 V 15,000 V 7,500 V W alking across vinyl floor 12,000 V 5,000 V 3,000 V Motions of bench worker 6,000 V 800 V 400 V Removing DIPS from plastic tube 2,000 V 700 V 400 V Removing DIPS from vin yl tra y 11,500 V 4,000 V 2,000 V Removing DIPS from Styrof oam 14,500 V 5,000 V 3,500 V Removing b ubb le pack from PCB 26,500 V 20,000 V 7,000 V P acking PCBs in f oam-lined bo x 21,000 V 11,000 V 5,000 V â A product can be degraded by as little as 700 V. Ta b l e 4 - 2 Static-Shielding Materials Material Use V oltage Pr otection Level Antistatic plastic Bags 1,500 V Carbon-loaded plastic F loor mats 7,500 V Metallized laminate Floor mats 5,000 V
Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 5â1 5 Remo v al an d Repl acem ent Pr ocedure s This chapter provides remo val and replacement procedures. There are as many as 72 scre ws and screw locks, in 14 dif ferent sizes and types, that may ha ve to be remo ve d, replaced, or loosened when servicing the computer . Make special note of each scre w and scre w lock size and location during remo v al and replacement. Refer to Appendix A, âScrew Listing, â for detailed information on scre w and scre w lock sizes, locations, and usage.
5â2 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Re mo val and R e placemen t Pr ocedur es 5 . 1 Seri al Number Report the computer serial number to HP when requesting information or ordering spare parts. The serial number is located on the bottom of the computer . Ser ial Number L ocation
R emo v al and Replace ment Pr ocedure s Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 5â3 5 .2 Disassem bl y Seque nce C hart Use the chart belo w to determine the section number to be referenced when removing computer components. Disassembl y Sequence Char t Section Description # of Screws Remo ved 5.3 Preparing the Computer for Disassemb ly Batter y 0 0 5.4 Hard Drive 2 loosened to remov e the hard drive co ver 1 loosened to remov e the hard drive 4 to disassemble hard driv e 5.5 Computer F eet 0 5.6 Optical Drive 1 to remov e the optical dr ive 2 to remov e the optical dr ive brac k et 5.7 External Memor y Module 1 loosened to remov e the memor y module compar tment cov er 5.8 Bluetooth Module 1 loosened to remov e the Bluetooth module cov er 2 remov ed to remov e Bluetooth module 5.9 Key b o a r d 2 5.10 F an Assembly 4 loosened on f an assembly 4 remov ed on ther mal plate 5.11 Heat Sink 4 loosened 5.12 Processor 1 loosened
5â4 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Re mo val and R e placemen t Pr ocedur es Section Description # of Screws Remo ved 5.13 Inter nal Memor y Module 0 5.14 RT C B a t t e r y 0 5.15 T ouchP ad 1 5.16 Mini Card Module 2 5.17 Switch Cov er 3 5.18 Displa y Assemb ly 8 Ã T o pre v ent an unresponsiv e system and the displa y of a warning message, install only a Mini Card de vice authorized f or use in your computer b y the gov er nmental agency that regulates wireless de vices in yo ur countr y . If you install a de vice and then receive a w a rning message, remov e the device to restore computer functionality . Then contact Customer Care. 5.19 To p C o v e r 16 scre ws 5.20 Modem Module 2 5.21 System Board 4 screws 2 screw loc k s 5.22 System Board F rame 2 screw loc k s 3 screws 5.23 Serial Connector Module 0 5.26 USB/A udio Board 2 Disassembl y Sequence Char t (Continued)
R emo v al and Replace ment Pr ocedure s Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 5â5 5 .3 Preparing t he C om puter for Di sassem bl y Before you begin an y remo v al or installation procedures: 1. Shut do wn the computer . If you are unsure whether the computer is of f or in hibernation, turn the computer on, and then shut it do wn through the operating system. 2. Disconnect all external de vices connected to the computer . 3. Disconnect the po wer cord. 4. Remov e the battery by follo wing these steps: a. T urn the computer upside do wn with the rear panel to ward you. b . Slide the battery release latch on the right 1 and then the battery release latch on the left 2 to release the battery . c. Slide the battery pack 3 straight back and remov e it. R emo v ing the Battery P ack Re v erse the abov e procedure to install the battery pack. Battery Spare P ar t Number Inf ormation 8-cell, 4.8-AHr 372771-001
5â6 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Re mo val and R e placemen t Pr ocedur es 5 .4 H ard Dri v e 1. Prepare the computer for disassembly ( Section 5.3 ). Har d Drive Spare P art Number Information 7200 r pm 100 GB 80 GB 416415-001 417507-001 5400 r pm 120 GB 100 GB 80 GB 60 GB 416414-001 413853-001 413852-001 413851-001
R emo v al and Replace ment Pr ocedure s Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 5â7 2. Loosen the two Phillips PM2.0Ã5.0 scre ws 1 that secure the hard dri ve co v er to the computer . 3. Lift the left side of the hard dri ve co v er 2 and swing it to the right. 4. Remov e the hard driv e co ver . â The hard dri ve co v er is included in the Plastics Kit, spare part number 417527-001. R emo v ing the Har d Dr i v e C o ve r
5â8 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Re mo val and R e placemen t Pr ocedur es 5. Loosen the Phillips PM2.5Ã13.0 spring-loaded hard dri v e retention scre w 1 . 6. Grasp the mylar tab 2 on the left side of the hard dri v e and slide the hard dri v e to the right 3 to disconnect it from the system board. 7. Remov e the hard driv e 4 from the hard dri ve bay . R emo v ing the Har d Dr i v e
R emo v al and Replace ment Pr ocedure s Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 5â9 8. Remov e the four Phillips PM3.0Ã3.0 screws 1 that secure the hard dri ve frame to the hard dri ve. 9. Lift the frame 2 straight up to remov e if from the hard dri ve. R emo v ing the Har d Dr i v e F rame Re v erse the abov e procedure to reassemble and install the hard dri ve.
5â10 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Re mo val and R e placemen t Pr ocedur es 5. 5 C o m p u t e r F e e t The computer feet are adhesi v e-backed rubber pads. The feet are included in the Plastics Kit, spare part number 417527-001. R eplac ing the Com puter F eet
R emo v al and Replace ment Pr ocedure s Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 5â11 5 .6 O ptical Dri v e 1. Prepare the computer for disassembly ( Section 5.3 ). 2. Position the computer with the left side to ward you. 3. Remov e the T orx8 T8M2.5Ã4.0 scre w 1 that secures the optical dri ve to the computer . 4. Insert a flat-bladed scre wdri v er into the slot 2 on the bottom of the computer and push the tab . 5. Remov e the optical driv e 3 from the computer . R emo v ing the Opti cal Dr i v e Optical Drive Spare P art Number Information 8X Max D VD±RW and CD-R W Double-La y er Combo Dr iv e 4X Max D VD±RW and CD-R W Double-La y er Combo Dr iv e 24X Max D VD/CD-RW Combo Driv e 8X Max D VD-ROM drive 413702-001 413700-001 413701-001 413699-001
5â12 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Re mo val and R e placemen t Pr ocedur es 6. If it is necessary to replace the optical dri ve brack et, remov e the two Phillips PM2.0Ã3.0 scre ws 1 that secure the bracket to the optical dri v e. 7. Remov e the optical driv e bracket 2 . R emo v ing the Opti cal Dr i v e Br ack et Re v erse the abov e procedure to reassemble and install an optical dri ve.
R emo v al and Replace ment Pr ocedure s Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 5â13 5 .7 External Memor y Modul e 1. Prepare the computer for disassembly (refer to Section 5.3 ). 2. Position the computer with the front to ward you. Memory Module Spare P ar t Number Inf ormation PC2-5300 2048 MB 1024 MB 512 MB 256 MB 417506-001 414046-001 414045-001 414044-001 PC2-4200 2048 MB 1024 MB 512 MB 256 MB 417505-001 414042-001 414041-001 414040-001
5â14 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Re mo val and R e placemen t Pr ocedur es 3. Loosen the Phillips PM2.0Ã4.0 scre w 1 that secures the memory module compartment cov er to the computer . 4. Lift the right side of the cov er 2 and swing it up and to the left. 5. Remov e the memory module compartment cover . â The memory module compartment cov er is included in the Plastics Kit, spare part number 417527-001. R emo v ing the Memory Module Compartment Co ver
R emo v al and Replace ment Pr ocedure s Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 5â15 6. Spread the retaining tabs 1 on each side of the memory module socket to release the memory module. (The side of the module opposite the socket rises a way from the computer .) 7. Slide the module 2 aw ay from the socket at an angle. 8. Remov e the memory module. â Memory modules are designed with a notch 3 to pre vent incorrect installation into the memory module socket. R emo v ing the Exter nal Memory Module Re v erse the abov e procedure to install an external memory module.
5â16 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Re mo val and R e placemen t Pr ocedur es 5 .8 Bluetoot h Modul e 1. Prepare the computer for disassembly (refer to Section 5.3 ). 2. Position the computer with the right side to ward you. 3. Loosen the Phillips PM1.5Ã3.0 scre w 1 that secures the Bluetooth module cov er to the computer . 4. Remov e the Bluetooth module cover 2 from the computer . â The Bluetooth module cov er is included in the Plastics Kit, spare part number 417527-001. 5. Disconnect the Bluetooth module cable 3 from the system board. R emo v ing the Blueto oth Module Bluetooth Module Spare P ar t Number Information Bluetooth module (includes Blue tooth module cab le) 398393-001
R emo v al and Replace ment Pr ocedure s Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 5â17 6. Remov e the two Phillips PM1.5Ã3.0 screws 1 that secure the Bluetooth module to the Bluetooth module cov er . 7. Remov e the Bluetooth module 2 from the co ver . 8. Disconnect the Bluetooth module cable 3 from the module. R emo v ing the Blueto oth Module Co ver Re v erse the abov e procedure to install a Bluetooth module.
5â18 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Re mo val and R e placemen t Pr ocedur es 5. 9 Ke y b o a r d Ke yboard Spare P ar t Number Information K eyboards with pointing stick f or use in: Belgium Brazil The Czech Repub lic Denmark F rance F rench Canada Ger many Greece Hungar y Iceland Inter nationally Israel Italy Ja pan Ko r e a 416416-A41 416416-201 416416-221 416416-081 416416-051 416416-121 416416-041 416416-151 416416-211 416416-DD1 416416-B31 416416-BB1 416416-061 416416-291 416416-AD1 Latin America Norwa y P or tugal Russia Saudi Arabia Slov akia Slov enia Spain Sweden Switzerland Ta i w a n Thailand Tu r k e y The United Kingdom The United States 416416-161 416416-091 416416-131 416416-251 416416-171 416416-231 416416-BA1 416416-071 416416-101 416416-111 416416-AB1 416416-281 416416-141 416416-031 416416-001
R emo v al and Replace ment Pr ocedure s Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 5â19 1. Prepare the computer for disassembly ( Section 5.3 ). 2. Position the computer with the front to ward you. K eyboards without pointing stick f or use in: Belgium Brazil The Czech Repub lic Denmark F rance F rench Canada Ger many Greece Hungar y Iceland Inter nationally Israel Italy Ja pan Ko r e a 416417-A41 416417-201 416417-221 416417-081 416417-051 416417-121 416417-041 416417-151 416417-211 416417-DD1 416417-B31 416417-BB1 416417-061 416417-291 416417-AD1 Latin America Norwa y P or tugal Russia Saudi Arabia Slov akia Slov enia Spain Sweden Switzerland Ta i w a n Thailand Tu r k e y The United Kingdom The United States 416417-161 416417-091 416417-131 416417-251 416417-171 416417-231 416417-BA1 416417-071 416417-101 416417-111 416417-AB1 416417-281 416417-141 416417-031 416417-001 Ke yboard Spare P ar t Number Information (Continued)
5â20 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Re mo val and R e placemen t Pr ocedur es 3. Remov e the two T orx8 T8M2.5Ã1 0.0 scre ws that secure the ke yboard to the computer . R emo v ing the K ey boar d Scr ew s
R emo v al and Replace ment Pr ocedure s Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 5â21 4. T urn the computer display side up with the front to ward you. 5. Open the computer as far as possible. 6. Slide the four ke yboard retention tabs 1 to ward you. The tabs are located between the esc and f1 ke ys, between the f4 and f5 ke ys, between the f8 and f9 ke ys, and between the f12 and delete ke ys. 7. Lift the rear edge of the ke yboard 2 and swing it to ward you until it rests on the palm rest. R eleasing the K ey board
5â2 2 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Re mo val and R e placemen t Pr ocedur es 8. Release the zero insertion force (ZIF) connector 1 to which the ke yboard cable is connected and disconnect the ke yboard cable 2 from the system board. â Step 9 applies to models with ke yboards with pointing sticks. 9. Release the ZIF connector 3 to which the pointing stick cable is connected and disconnect the pointing stick cable 4 from the system board. Disconnec ting the K e y boar d and P ointing S tick C able s 10. Remov e the keyboard. Re v erse the abov e procedure to install the ke yboard.
R emo v al and Replace ment Pr ocedure s Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 5â2 3 5. 1 0 Fa n A s s e m b l y 1. Prepare the computer for disassembly ( Section 5.3 ). 2. Release the ke yboard ( Section 5.9 ). F an Assembl y Spare P ar t Number Information F an assembly 416409-001
5â2 4 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Re mo val and R e placemen t Pr ocedur es 3. Disconnect the fan cable 1 from the system board. â The follo wing scre ws should be remo ved, then installed, in the 1, 2, 3, 4 sequence stamped on the fan assembly . 4. Loosen the two Phillips PM2.0Ã3.0 scre ws 2 and the two Phillips PM2.5Ã7.0 scre ws 3 that secure the fan assembly to the computer . 5. Remov e the fan assembly 4 . â Due to the adhesi v e quality of the thermal paste located between the video heat sink and video board, it may be necessary to mov e the heat sink fr om side to side to detach the heat sink from the video board. R emo v ing the F an Assembl y
R emo v al and Replace ment Pr ocedure s Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 5â2 5 â The thermal paste should be thoroughly cleaned from the surfaces of the video board 1 and video heat sink 2 each time the fan assembly is remo v ed. Thermal paste is included with all fan assembly and system board spare part kits. R eplac ing the T hermal P ast e
5â2 6 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Re mo val and R e placemen t Pr ocedur es â The follo wing scre ws should be remo ved, then installed, in the 1, 2, 3, 4 sequence stamped on the thermal plate. 6. Remov e the four T orx8 T8M2.5Ã6.0 scre ws 1 that secure the thermal plate to the computer . 7. Remov e the thermal plate 2 . â Due to the adhesi v e quality of the thermal paste located between the thermal plate and video board, it may be necessary to mov e the thermal plate from side to side to detach the thermal plate from the video board. R emo v ing the T hermal P l ate
R emo v al and Replace ment Pr ocedure s Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 5â2 7 â The thermal paste should be thoroughly cleaned from the surfaces of the thermal plate 1 and video board 2 each time the thermal plate is remov ed. R eplac ing the T hermal P ast e Re v erse the abov e procedure to install the fan assembly and thermal plate.
5â2 8 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Re mo val and R e placemen t Pr ocedur es 5 . 1 1 Hea t Sink 1. Prepare the computer for disassembly ( Section 5.3 ). 2. Release the ke yboard ( Section 5.9 ). 3. Remov e the fan assembly ( Section 5.10 ). Heat Sink Spare P art Number Information Heat sink (includes ther mal paste) 416408-001
R emo v al and Replace ment Pr ocedure s Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 5â29 â The follo wing scre ws should be loosened and installed in the 1, 2, 3, 4 sequence stamped on the heat sink. 4. Loosen the four Phillips PM2.5Ã8.0 shoulder scre ws 1 that secure the heat sink to the computer . â Due to the adhesi v e quality of the thermal paste located between the heat sink and processor , it may be necessary to mov e the heat sink from side to side to detach the heat sink from the processor . 5. Lift the right side of the heat sink 2 until it disengages from the processor . 6. Slide the heat sink 3 to the right and remov e it. R emo v ing the Heat Sink
5â30 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Re mo val and R e placemen t Pr ocedur es â The thermal paste should be thoroughly cleaned from the surfaces of the heat sink 1 and processor 2 each time the heat sink is remov ed. Thermal paste is included with all heat sink and processor spare part kits. R eplac ing the T hermal P ast e Re v erse the abov e procedure to install the heat sink.
R emo v al and Replace ment Pr ocedure s Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 5â31 5. 1 2 P r o c e s s o r 1. Prepare the computer for disassembly ( Section 5.3 ) and remov e the follo wing components: a. K eyboard ( Section 5.9 ) b . F an assembly ( Section 5.10 ) c. Heat sink ( Section 5.11 ). Pr ocessor Spare P art Number Information Intel Core Duo T2600 (2.16-GHz) processor Intel Core Duo T2500 (2.00-GHz) processor Intel Core Duo T2400 (1.83-GHz) processor Intel Core Duo T2300 (1.67-GHz) processor 413686-001 413685-001 413684-001 413683-001
5â3 2 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Re mo val and R e placemen t Pr ocedur es 2. Use a flat-bladed scre wdri v er to turn the processor locking scre w 1 one-quarter turn counterclockwise until you hear ac l i c k . 3. Lift the processor 2 straight up and remov e it . â The gold triangle 3 on the processor should be aligned with the triangle icon 4 embossed on the processor socket when you install the processor. R emo v ing the Pr ocessor Re v erse the abov e procedure to install the processor .
R emo v al and Replace ment Pr ocedure s Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 5â33 5 . 1 3 Internal Memor y Modul e 1. Prepare the computer for disassembly ( Section 5.3 ). 2. Release the ke yboard ( Section 5.9 ). Memory Module Spare P ar t Number Inf ormation PC2-5300 2048 MB 1024 MB 512 MB 256 MB 417506-001 414046-001 414045-001 414044-001 PC2-4200 2048 MB 1024 MB 512 MB 256 MB 417505-001 414042-001 414041-001 414040-001
5â3 4 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Re mo val and R e placemen t Pr ocedur es 3. Spread the retaining tabs 1 on each side of the memory module socket to release the memory module board. (The side of the module opposite the socket rises a way from the computer .) 4. Slide the module aw ay from the socket at an angle 2 . 5. Remov e the memory module. â Memory modules are designed with a notch 3 to pre vent incorrect installation into the memory module socket. R emo v ing the Inte rnal Me mory Module Re v erse the abov e procedure to install an internal memory module.
R emo v al and Replace ment Pr ocedure s Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 5â35 5. 1 4 R TC B a t t e r y â The R TC battery is included in the Plastics Kit, spare part number 417527-001. 1. Prepare the computer for disassembly ( Section 5.3 ). 2. Release the ke yboard ( Section 5.9 ). 3. Remov e the R TC battery from the clip in the top cov er . R emo v ing the R T C Bat tery Re v erse the abov e procedure to install an R TC battery .
5â3 6 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Re mo val and R e placemen t Pr ocedur es 5. 1 5 To u c h Pa d 1. Prepare the computer for disassembly ( Section 5.3 ). 2. Remov e the keyboard ( Section 5.9 ). 3. T urn the computer upside do wn with the front to ward you. 4. Remov e the T orx8 T8M2.5Ã10.0 scre w that secures the T ouchPad to the computer . R emo v ing the T ouchP ad Sc r e w T ouchP ad Spare P ar t Number Information T ouchP ad with 3 T ouchP ad buttons T ouchP ad with 2 T ouchP ad buttons 382675-001 382676-001
R emo v al and Replace ment Pr ocedure s Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 5â3 7 5. T urn the computer display-side up with the front to ward you. 6. Open the computer as far as possible. 7. Lift up on the rear edge of the T ouchPad 1 until it disengages from the computer . 8. Slide the T ouchPad back 2 until it rests on the computer . R eleasing the T ouchP ad
5â3 8 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Re mo val and R e placemen t Pr ocedur es 9. Disconnect the T ouchPad cable 1 from the system board. 10. Remov e the T ouchPad 2 . R emo v ing the T ouchP ad Re v erse the abov e procedure to install the T ouchPad.
R emo v al and Replace ment Pr ocedure s Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 5â3 9 5. 1 6 M i n i C a r d M o d u l e Mini Car d Module Spare P ar t Number Information 802.11 b/g HS WLAN module f or use in Nor th America 407253-001 802.11 b/g HS WLAN module f or use in the RO W countries listed below . 407253-002 China Ecuador Haiti Honduras P akistan Pe r u Qatar South K orea Uruguay V enezuela 802.11 b/g HS WLAN module f or use in Japan 407253-291 802.11 b/g LJ WLAN module f or use in Nor th America 407254-001 802.11 b/g LJ WLAN module f or use in the R O W countries listed below . 407254-002 China Ecuador Haiti Honduras P akistan Pe r u Qatar South K orea Uruguay V enezuela 802.11 b/g LJ WLAN module f or use in J apan 407254-291 802.11a/b/g GL WLAN module f o r use in the MO W1 countr ies listed below . 407575-001 Antigua & Barb uda Argentina Au s t ra l i a Bahamas Barbados Brunei Canada Chile Dominican Repub lic Guam Guatemala Hong K ong Pa n a m a India Indonesia Mala ysia Me xico Ne w Zealand Pa r a g u ay Saudi Arabia Ta i w a n The United States Vietnam
5â40 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Re mo val and R e placemen t Pr ocedur es 1. Prepare the computer for disassembly ( Section 5.3 ). 2. Remov e the keyboard ( Section 5.9 ). 3. Remov e the T ouchPad ( Section 5.15 ). 802.11 a/b/g GL WLAN module f or use in the MO W2 countr ies listed below: 407575-002 Aruba Au s t r i a Azerbaijan Bahrain Belgium Ber muda Bulgaria Ca yman Islands Columbia Croatia Cyprus Czech Repub lic Denmark Eg ypt El Salv ador Estonia Finland Fr a n c e Georgia Ger many Greece Hungar y Iceland Ireland Italy Latvia Lebanon The Philippines Po l a n d P or tugal Romania Russia Serbia and Montenegro Singapore Slov akia Liechtenstein Lithuania Lux embourg Malta Monaco The Netherlands Norwa y Oman Slov enia South Africa Spain Sri Lanka Sweden Switzerland Tu r k e y The United Kingdom Uzbekistan 802.11 a/b/g GL WLAN module f or use in the R O W countries listed below . 407575-003 China Ecuador Haiti Honduras P akistan Pe r u Qatar South K orea Uruguay V enezuela 802.11 a/b/g GL WLAN module f or use in Japan 407575-291 Mini Car d Module Spare P ar t Number Information (Continued)
R emo v al and Replace ment Pr ocedure s Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 5â41 4. Make note of which antenna cable is attached to which antenna clip on the Mini Ca rd module before disconnecting the cables, then disconnect the auxiliary and main antenna cables 1 from the Mini Card module. 5. Remov e the two Phillips PM2.0Ã4.0 screws 2 that secure the Mini Card module to the computer . (The edge of the module opposite the socket rises a way from the computer .) 6. Remov e the Mini Card module by pulling the module 3 aw ay from the socket at an angle. â Mini Card modules are designed with a notch 4 to pre vent incorrect installation. R emo v ing a Mini C ar d Module Re v erse the abov e procedure to install a Mini Card module.
5â4 2 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Re mo val and R e placemen t Pr ocedur es 5. 1 7 Sw i t c h C ove r â Both switch cov er spare part kits include the LED board and LED board cable. 1. Prepare the computer for disassembly ( Section 5.3 ). 2. Remov e the keyboard ( Section 5.9 ). 3. T urn the computer upside do wn with the rear panel to ward you. 4. Remov e the 3 Phillips PM2.0Ã2.0 screws that secure the switch cov er to the computer . R emo v ing the S w itc h Co ver S c r e w s Switch Co ver Spare Part Number Information F or use with nw8440 and nc8430 models F or use with nx8420 models 416405-001 416406-001
R emo v al and Replace ment Pr ocedure s Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 5â43 5. T urn the computer display-side up with the front to ward you. 6. Open the computer as far as possible. 7. Use a flat-bladed scre wdri ve r to lift up the left and right hinge cov er sections of the switch co ver 1 to detach it from the computer . 8. Swing the rear edge of the switch cov er 2 up and to ward you. R eleasing the S w itc h Co ve r
5â44 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Re mo val and R e placemen t Pr ocedur es 9. Disconnect the LED board cable 1 from the system board. 10. Remov e the switch cover 2 . R emo v ing the S w itc h Co ver Re v erse the abov e procedure to install the switch cov er .
R emo v al and Replace ment Pr ocedure s Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 5â45 5 . 1 8 Displa y Asse mbl y 1. Prepare the computer for disassembly ( Section 5.3 ) and remo ve the follo wing components: a. K eyboard ( Section 5.9 ) b . Switch co ver ( Section 5.17 ) c. T ouchPad ( Section 5.15 ) Displa y Assembl y Spare P ar t Number Information 15.4-inch, WUXGA 15.4-inch, WSXGA 15.4-inch, WXGA 416413-001 416412-001 416411-001
5â4 6 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Re mo val and R e placemen t Pr ocedur es 2. Make note of which antenna cable is attached to which antenna clip on the Mini Ca rd module before disconnecting the cables, then disconnect the wireless antenna cables 1 from the Mini Card module. 3. Remov e the wireless antenna cables from the top cover clips ( 2 and 3 ) through which they are routed. 4. Disconnect the display cable 4 from the system board. Disconnec ting the W ir eles s Ant enna and Displa y Ca bles
R emo v al and Replace ment Pr ocedure s Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 5â4 7 5. Remov e the two T orx8 T8M2.5Ã10.0 scre ws 1 and the two Phillips PM2.0Ã2.0 scre ws 2 that secure the display assembly to the computer . R emo v ing the Displa y Assembl y Sc r ew s
5â4 8 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Re mo val and R e placemen t Pr ocedur es 6. Position the computer with the rear panel to ward you. 7. Remov e the four T orx8 T8M2.5Ã10.0 scre ws 1 that secure the display assembly to the computer . 8. Lift the display assembly 2 straight up to remov e it. R emo v ing the Displa y Assembl y Re v erse the abov e procedure to install the display assembly .
R emo v al and Replace ment Pr ocedure s Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 5â4 9 5. 1 9 T o p C ove r 1. Prepare the computer for disassembly ( Section 5.3 ) and remo ve the follo wing components: a. Hard dri ve ( Section 5.4 ) b . Optical dri ve ( Section 5.6 ) c. K eyboard ( Section 5.9 ) d. Fan assembly ( Section 5.10 ) e. Switch cov er ( Section 5.17 ) f. T ouchPad ( Section 5.15 ) g. Display assembly ( Section 5.18 ) 2. T urn the computer upside do wn with the front to ward you. T op Co ver Spare Part Number Information F or use with nw8440 models with finger print reader F or use with nw8440 models without finger print reader F or use with nc8430 and nx8420 m odels with finger print reader F or use with nc8430 and nx8420 models without fingerpr int reader 418807-001 416401-001 416403-001 416042-001 Finger print reader board with cable 416400-001
5â5 0 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Re mo val and R e placemen t Pr ocedur es 3. Remov e the two rubber scre w cov ers 1 and the ele v en T orx8 T8M2.5Ã10.0 scre ws 2 that secure the top cov er to the computer . â The rubber scre w cov ers are a v ailable in the Screw Kit, spare part number 416419-001. R emo v ing the T op Co ver S cr ew s, P art 1
R emo v al and Replace ment Pr ocedure s Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 5â51 4. T urn the computer right-side up with the front to ward you. 5. Disconnect the speaker cable 1 from the system board. â Step 6 applies only to computer models with a f ingerprint reader . 6. Disconnect the f ingerprint reader cable 2 from the system board. 7. Remov e the four T orx8 T8M2.5Ã4.0 scre ws 3 that secure the top cov er to the computer . R emo v ing the T op Co ver S cr ew s, P art 2
5â5 2 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Re mo val and R e placemen t Pr ocedur es 8. Lift the front edge of the top cov er 1 until it disengages from the base enclosure. 9. Lift the top cov er 2 straight up and remove it. R emo v ing the T op Co ver Re v erse the abov e procedure to install the top cov er .
R emo v al and Replace ment Pr ocedure s Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 5â5 3 5 .20 Modem Modul e 1. Prepare the computer for disassembly ( Section 5.3 ) and remo ve the follo wing components: a. Hard dri ve ( Section 5.4 ) b . Optical dri ve ( Section 5.6 ) c. K eyboard ( Section 5.9 ) d. Switch cov er ( Section 5.17 ) e. T ouchPad ( Section 5.15 ) f. Display assembly ( Section 5.18 ) g. T op cov er ( Section 5.19 ) Modem Module Spare P art Number Information Modem module 413691-001
5â5 4 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Re mo val and R e placemen t Pr ocedur es 2. Remov e the two Phillips PM2.5Ã4.0 screws 1 that secure the modem board to the system board. 3. Lift the right side of the modem module 2 to disconnect it from the system board. 4. Disconnect the modem cable 3 from the modem module. 5. Remov e the modem module. R emo v ing the Modem Module Re v erse the abov e procedure to install the modem module.
R emo v al and Replace ment Pr ocedure s Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 5â5 5 5. 2 1 Sys t e m B o a r d â When replacing the system board, be sure that the follo wing components are remov ed from the defectiv e system board and installed on the replacement system board: â Memory modules ( Section 5.7 and Section 5.13 ) â Processor ( Section 5.12 ) â R TC battery ( Section 5.14) â Mini Card module ( Section 5.16 ) â Modem module ( Section 5.20 ) System Boar d Spare P art Number Information System board (includes R T C batter y and 256-MB of video memor y) 416397-001
5â5 6 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Re mo val and R e placemen t Pr ocedur es 1. Prepare the computer for disassembly ( Section 5.3 ) and remov e the follo wing components: a. Hard dri ve ( Section 5.4 ) b . Optical dri ve ( Section 5.6 ) c. Bluetooth module ( Section 5.8 ) d. K e yboard ( Section 5.9 ) e. Fan assembly ( Section 5.10 ) f. Heat sink ( Section 5.11 ) g. T ouchPad ( Section 5.15 ) h. Switch cov er ( Section 5.17 ) i. Display assembly ( Section 5.18 ) j. T op cov er ( Section 5.19 ) 2. Position the computer with the rear panel to ward you.
R emo v al and Replace ment Pr ocedure s Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 5â5 7 3. Disconnect the follo wing cables from the system board: 1 Serial connector module cable 2 Modem cable 3 USB board cable 4 Audio board cable 5 Modem cable Disconnec ting the S ys tem Boar d Cables
5â5 8 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Re mo val and R e placemen t Pr ocedur es 4. Remov e the following: 1 T wo T orx T8M2.5Ã6.0 scre ws 2 T wo T orx T8M2.5Ã4.0 scre ws 3 T wo HM5.0Ã10.0 scre w locks on each side of the external monitor connector R emo v ing the S y stem Boar d Scr ew s and Scr e w L ocks
R emo v al and Replace ment Pr ocedure s Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 5â5 9 5. Remov e the modem cable 1 from the clip in the base enclosure. 6. Remov e the modem cable 2 from the clips in the system board. 7. Remov e the modem connector 3 from the clip in the base enclosure. R eleasing the S y stem Boar d, P art 1
5â60 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Re mo val and R e placemen t Pr ocedur es 8. Flex the right side of the base enclosure 1 until the USB 2 , 1394 3 , and RJ-45 connectors 4 are clear of the base enclosure. 9. Lift the left side of the system board 5 until it rests at an angle. R eleasing the S y stem Boar d, P art 2
R emo v al and Replace ment Pr ocedure s Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 5â61 10. Lift the front edge of the system board 1 until it rests at an angle. 11. Slide the system board 2 forward until the rear -right section of the system board 3 is clear of the scre w boss 4 on the system board frame. 12. Remov e the system board 5 from the base enclosure. R emo v ing the S y stem Boar d Re v erse the abov e procedure to install the system board.
5â6 2 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Re mo val and R e placemen t Pr ocedur es 5 .2 2 S y s tem Board Frame 1. Prepare the computer for disassembly ( Section 5.3 ) and remov e the follo wing components: a. Hard dri ve ( Section 5.4 ) b . Optical dri ve ( Section 5.6 ) c. Bluetooth module ( Section 5.8 ) d. K e yboard ( Section 5.9 ) e. Fan assembly ( Section 5.10 ) f. Heat sink ( Section 5.11 ) g. T ouchPad ( Section 5.15 ) h. Switch cov er ( Section 5.17 ) i. Display assembly ( Section 5.18 ) j. T op cov er ( Section 5.19 ) k. System board ( Section 5.21 ) 2. Position the computer with the rear panel to ward you. System Boar d Frame Spare P art Number Information System board frame (includes modem cab le) 416407-001
R emo v al and Replace ment Pr ocedure s Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 5â63 3. Remov e the two Hex HM5.0Ã12.0 scre w locks 1 on each side of the serial connector . 4. Remov e the three T orx8 T8M2.5Ã6.0 scre ws 2 that secure the system board frame to the base enclosure. 5. Remov e the audio board and USB board cables 3 from the base enclosure. 6. Lift the rear edge of the system board frame 4 until it disengages from the base enclosure. 7. Remov e the system board frame. R emo v e the S ys tem Boar d F r ame
5â64 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Re mo val and R e placemen t Pr ocedur es 8. If it is necessary to replace the modem cable, remov e the modem connector and cable 1 from the clips 2 in the system board frame. R emo v ing the Modem Ca ble Re v erse the abov e procedures to install the system board frame.
R emo v al and Replace ment Pr ocedure s Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 5â6 5 5 .2 3 Serial C onnec tor Modul e 1. Prepare the computer for disassembly ( Section 5.3 ) and remov e the follo wing components: a. Hard dri ve ( Section 5.4 ) b . Optical dri ve ( Section 5.6 ) c. Bluetooth module ( Section 5.8 ) d. K e yboard ( Section 5.9 ) e. Fan assembly ( Section 5.10 ) f. Heat sink ( Section 5.11 ) g. T ouchPad ( Section 5.15 ) h. Switch cov er ( Section 5.17 ) i. Display assembly ( Section 5.18 ) j. T op cov er ( Section 5.19 ) k. System board ( Section 5.21 ) l. System board frame ( Section 5.22 ) 2. Position the system board frame with the rear panel to ward you. Serial Connector Module Spare P ar t Number Information Serial connector module and cable 416399-001
5â6 6 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Re mo val and R e placemen t Pr ocedur es 3. Remov e the serial connector module cable 1 from the clips in the system board frame. 4. Remov e the serial connector module 2 from the system board frame. R emo v ing the Se ri al C onnect or Module and Ca ble Re v erse the abov e procedure to install the serial connector module.
R emo v al and Replace ment Pr ocedure s Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 5â6 7 5 .2 4 USB/Au dio Bo ard 1. Prepare the computer for disassembly ( Section 5.3 ) and remov e the follo wing components: a. Hard dri ve ( Section 5.4 ) b . Optical dri ve ( Section 5.6 ) c. Bluetooth module ( Section 5.8 ) d. K e yboard ( Section 5.9 ) e. Fan assembly ( Section 5.10 ) f. Heat sink ( Section 5.11 ) g. T ouchPad ( Section 5.15 ) h. Switch cov er ( Section 5.17 ) i. Display assembly ( Section 5.18 ) j. T op cov er ( Section 5.19 ) k. System board ( Section 5.21 ) l. System board frame ( Section 5.22 ) 2. Position the base enclosure with the front to ward you. USB/A udio Boar d Spare P ar t Number Information USB/audio board (includes USB board cable and audio board cable) 416398-001
5â6 8 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Re mo val and R e placemen t Pr ocedur es 3. Remov e the two T orx8 T8M2.5Ã4.0 scre ws 1 that secure the USB/audio board to the base enclosure. 4. Lift the left side of the USB/audio board 2 to disengage it from the base enclosure. R emo v ing the U SB/Audi o Boar d Re v erse the abov e procedure to install the USB/audio board.
Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 6â1 6 Spec ifica tions This chapter provides physical and performance specif ications. Ta b l e 6 - 1 Computer Dimensions Metric U .S. Height (front to back) Width Depth 2.8 to 3.3 cm 35.8 cm 25.9 cm 1.1 to 1.3 in 14.1 in 10.2 in W eight 2.81 kg 6.2 lbs Input P ower Operating v oltage Operating current 19.0 V dc @ 4.74 A â 90 W 4.74 A T e mperature Operating (not writing to optical disc) Operating (writing to optical disc) Nonoperating 0°C to 35°C 5°C to 35°C -20°C to 60°C 32°F to 95°F 41°F to 95°F -4°F to 140°F
6â2 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Spe cificat ion s Relative humidity (noncondensing) Operating Nonoperating 10% to 90% 5% to 95% 10% to 90% 5% to 95% Maximum altitude (unpressurized) Operating (14.7 to 10.1 psia) Nonoperating (14.7 to 4.4 psia) -15 m to 3,048 m -15 m to 12,192 m -50 ft to 10,000 ft -50 ft to 40,000 ft Shock Operating Nonoperating 125 g, 2 ms, half-sine 200 g, 2 ms, half-sine Random Vibration Operating Nonoperating 0.75 g zero-to-peak, 10 Hz to 500 Hz, 0.25 oct/min s weep r ate 1.50 g zero-to-peak, 10 Hz to 500 Hz, 0.5 oct/min s weep r ate â Applicable product safety standards specify thermal limits for plastic surfaces. The computer operates well within this range of temperatures. Ta b l e 6 - 1 Computer (Continued)
Spe cificat ion s Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 6â3 Ta b l e 6 - 2 15.4-inch, WUXGA WV A Dimensions Height Width Diagonal 20.7 cm 33.1 cm 39.1 cm 8.1 in 13.0 in 15.4 in Number of colors Up to 16.8 million Contrast ratio 200:1 Brightness 180 nits typical Pixel resolution Pitch Fo r m a t Configuration 0.172 à 0.172 mm 1920 à 1200 RGB v er tical str ipe Backlight CCFT Character display 80 à 25 T otal power consumption 6.0 W Viewing angle /-65° horizontal, /-50° v er tical typical
6â4 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Spe cificat ion s Ta b l e 6 - 3 15.4-inch, WSXGA WV A Dimensions Height Width Diagonal 20.7 cm 33.1 cm 39.1 cm 8.1 in 13.0 in 15.4 in Number of colors Up to 16.8 million Contrast ratio 200:1 Brightness 180 nits typical Pixel resolution Pitch Fo r m a t Configuration 0.197 à 0.197 mm 1680 à 1050 RGB v er tical str ipe Backlight CCFT Character display 80 à 25 T otal power consumption 7.0 W Viewing angle /-60° horizontal, 40/-50° v er tical typical
Spe cificat ion s Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 6â5 Ta b l e 6 - 4 15.4-inch, WXGA WV A Dimensions Height Width Diagonal 20.7 cm 33.1 cm 39.1 cm 8.1 in 13.0 in 15.4 in Number of colors Up to 16.8 million Contrast ratio 200:1 Brightness 180 nits typical Pixel resolution Pitch Fo r m a t Configuration 0.259 à 0.259 mm 1440 à 900 RGB v er tical str ipe Backlight CCFT Character display 80 à 25 T otal power consumption 6.5 W Viewing angle /-45° horizontal, 15/-35° v er tical typical
6â6 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Spe cificat ion s Ta b l e 6 - 5 Har d Drives 120-GB* 100-GB* 80-GB* 60-GB* Dimensions Height Width We i g h t 9.5 mm 70 mm 99 g 9.5 mm 70 mm 99 g 9.5 mm 70 mm 99 g 9.5 mm 70 mm 99 g Interface type SA T A SA T A SA T A SA T A T ransfer rate Synchronous (maximum) Security 100 MB/sec ATA security 100 MB/sec ATA security 100 MB/sec ATA s e c u r i t y 100 MB/sec ATA security Seek times (typical read, including setting) Single trac k Ave r a g e Maximum 3 ms 13 ms 24 ms 3 ms 13 ms 24 ms 3 ms 13 ms 24 ms 3 ms 13 ms 24 ms Logical bloc ks â 234,436,400 195,363,650 156,301,488 117,210,240 Disc rotational speed 5400 r pm 7200 and 5400 r pm 7200 and 5400 r pm 5400 r pm Operating temperature 5°C to 55°C (41°F to 131°F) â Certain restrictions and exclusi ons apply. Consult Customer Care for details. *1 GB = 1 billion b ytes when ref erring to hard dr iv e storage capacity . Actual accessible capacity is less . â Actual drive specificatio ns ma y differ slightly .
Spe cificat ion s Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 6â7 Ta b l e 6 - 6 D VD±R W and CD-R W Double-La yer Combo Drive Applicable disc Read: DV D - R , DV D - R W, D VD-ROM (D VD-5, D VD-9, DV D - 1 0 , DV D - 1 8 ) , CD-R OM (Mode 1 and 2) CD Digital A udio CD-XA ready (Mode 2, F or m 1 and 2) CD-I ready (Mode 2, F or m 1 and 2) CD-R, CD-R W Photo CD (single and multisession) CD-Bridge Write: CD-R and CD-R W D VD-R and DV D - R W Center hole diameter 1.5 cm (0.59 in) Disc diameter Standard disc Mini disc 12 cm (4.72 in) 8 cm (3.15 in)
6â8 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Spe cificat ion s Disc thickness 1.2 mm (0.047 in) T rack pitc h 0.74 µm Access time CD D VD Random Full strok e < 175 ms < 285 ms < 230 ms < 335 ms A udio output level A udio-out, 0.7 Vr ms Cache b uffer 2 MB Data transfer rate CD-R (16X) CD-R W (8X) CD-R OM (24X) DV D ( 8 X ) D VD-R (4X) DV D - R W ( 2 X ) Multiword DMA mode 2 2,400 KB/s (150 KB/s at 1X CD rate) 1,200 KB/s (150 KB/s at 1X CD rate) 3,600 KB/s (150 KB/s at 1X CD rate) 10,800 KB/s (1,352 KB/s at 1X D VD rate) 5,400 KB/s (1,352 KB/s at 1X D VD rate) 2,700 KB/s (1,352 KB/s at 1X D VD rate) 16.6 MB/s Star tup time < 15 seconds Stop time < 6 seconds Ta b l e 6 - 6 D VD±R W and CD-R W Double-La yer Combo Drive (Continued)
Spe cificat ion s Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 6â9 Ta b l e 6 - 7 D VD/CD-R W Combo Drive D VD-ROM drive Applicable disc Read: DV D - R , DV D - R W, D VD-ROM (D VD-5, D VD-9, DV D - 1 0 , DV D - 1 8 ) , CD-R OM (Mode 1 and 2) CD Digital A udio CD-XA ready (Mode 2, F or m 1 and 2) CD-I ready (Mode 2, F or m 1 and 2) CD-R, CD-R W Photo CD (single and multisession) CD-Bridge Write: CD-R and CD-R W Center hole diameter 1.5 cm (0.59 in) Disc diameter Standard disc Mini disc 12 cm (4.72 in) 8 cm (3.15 in)
6â10 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Spe cificat ion s Disc thickness 1.2 mm (0.047 in) T rack pitc h 0.74 µm Access time CD D VD Random Full strok e < 110 ms < 210 ms < 130 ms < 225 ms A udio output level A udio-out, 0.7 Vr ms Cache b uffer 2 MB Data transfer rate CD-R (24X) CD-R W (10X) CD-R OM (24X) DV D ( 8 X ) Multiword DMA mode 2 3,600 KB/s (150 KB/s at 1X CD rate) 1,500 KB/s (150 KB/s at 1X CD rate) 3,600 KB/s (150 KB/s at 1X CD rate) 10,800 KB/s (1,352 KB/s at 1X D VD rate) 16.6 MB/s Star tup time < 15 seconds Stop time < 6 seconds Ta b l e 6 - 7 D VD/CD-R W Combo Drive (Continued)
Spe cificat ion s Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 6â11 Ta b l e 6 - 8 DV D - R O M D r i v e Applicable disc DV D - R O M ( DV D - 5 , DV D - 9 , DV D - 1 0 , DV D - 1 8 ) CD-R OM (Mode 1 and 2) CD Digital A udio CD-XA ready (Mode 2, F orm 1 and 2) CD-I ready (Mode 2, F or m 1 and 2) CD-R CD-R W Photo CD (single and multisession) CD-Bridge Center hole diameter 1.5 cm (0.59 in) Disc diameter Standard disc Mini disc 12 cm (4.72 in) 8 cm (3.15 in) Disc thickness 1.2 mm (0.047 in) T rack pitc h 0.74 µm Access time CD D VD Random Full strok e < 100 ms < 175 ms < 125 ms < 225 ms A udio output level Line-out, 0.7 Vr ms Cache b uffer 512 MB Data transfer rate CD-R (24X) CD-R W (10X) CD-R OM (24X) DV D ( 8 X ) Multiword DMA mode 2 3,600 KB/s (150 KB/s at 1X CD rate) 1,500 KB/s (150 KB/s at 1X CD rate) 3,600 KB/s (150 KB/s at 1X CD rate) 10,800 KB/s (1,352 KB/s at 1X D VD rate) 16.6 MB/s Star tup time < 15 seconds Stop time < 6 seconds
6â12 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Spe cificat ion s Ta b l e 6 - 9 System DMA Hard ware DMA System Function DMA0 Not applicable DMA1* Not applicable DMA2* Not applicable DMA3 Not applicable DMA4 Direct memor y access controller DMA5* A vailab le f or PC Card DMA6 Not assigned DMA7 Not assigned *PC Card controller ca n use DMA 1, 2, or 5.
Spe cificat ion s Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 6â13 T a bl e 6-10 System Interrupts Hard ware IRQ System Function IRQ0 System timer IRQ1 Standard 101-/102-K ey or Microsoft Natural K eyboard IRQ2 Cascaded IRQ3 Intel 82801DB/DBM USB2 Enhanced Host Controllerâ24CD IRQ4 COM1 IRQ5* Cone xant A CâLink A udio Intel 82801DB/DBM SMBus Controllerâ24C3 Data F ax Modem with Smar tCP IRQ6 Diskette driv e IRQ7* P arallel por t IRQ8 System CMOS/real-time clock IRQ9* Microsoft A CPI-compliant system IRQ10* Intel USB UHCI controllerâ24C2 Intel 82852/82855 GM/GME Graphic Controller Realtek R TL8139 F amily PCI f ast Ether net Controller
6â14 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Spe cificat ion s IRQ11 Intel USB EHCI controllerâ24CD Intel USB UHCI controllerâ24C4 Intel USB UHCI controllerâ24C7 Intel Pro/Wireless 2200BG TI OHCI 1394 host controller TI PCI1410 CardBus controller IRQ12 Synaptics PS/2 T ouchP ad IRQ13 Numeric data processor IRQ14 Primar y IDE channel IRQ15 Secondar y IDE channel *Def ault configuration; audio possib le configurations are IRQ5, IRQ7, IRQ9, IRQ10, or none. â PC Cards may assert IRQ3, IRQ4, IR Q5, IRQ7, IRQ9, IRQ10, IRQ11, or IRQ15. Either the infrared or the se rial port may assert IRQ3 or IRQ4. T a bl e 6-10 System Interrupts (Continued)
Spe cificat ion s Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 6â15 T able 6-11 System I/O Addresses I/O Address (he x) System Function (shipping configuration) 000 - 00F DMA controller no . 1 010 - 01F Unused 020 - 021 Interrupt controller no . 1 022 - 024 Opti chipset configur ation registers 025 - 03F Unused 02E - 02F 87334 âSuper I/Oâ configuration f or CPU 040 - 05F Counter/timer registers 044 - 05F Unused 060 K eyboard controller 061 P or t B 062 - 063 U nused 064 K eyboard controller 065 - 06F Unused 070 - 071 N MI enable/R TC 072 - 07F Unused 080 - 08F DMA page registers 090 - 091 U nused 092 P or t A 093 - 09F Unused 0A0 - 0A1 Interrupt controller no . 2
6â16 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Spe cificat ion s I/O Address (he x) System Function (shipping configuration) 0A2 - 0BF Unused 0C0 - 0DF DMA controller no . 2 0E0 - 0EF Unused 0F0 - 0F1 Coprocessor busy clear/reset 0F2 - 0FF Unused 100 - 16F Unused 170 - 177 S econdar y fix ed disk controller 178 - 1EF Unused 1F0 - 1F7 Primar y fixed disk controller 1F8 - 200 Unused 201 Jo yStick (decoded in ESS1688) 202 - 21F Unused 220 - 22F Enter tainment audio 230 - 26D Unused 26E - 26 Unused 278 - 27F Unused 280 - 2AB Unused 2A0 - 2A7 Unused 2A8 - 2E7 Unused 2E8 - 2EF Reser v ed serial por t T able 6-11 System I/O Addresses (Continued)
Spe cificat ion s Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 6â17 I/O Address (he x) System Function (shipping configuration) 2F0 - 2F7 Unused 2F8 - 2FF Infrared por t 300 - 31F Unused 320 - 36F Unused 370 - 377 S econdar y diskette driv e controller 378 - 37F P arallel por t (LPT1/def ault) 380 - 387 U nused 388 - 38B FM synthesizerâOPL3 38C - 3AF Unused 3B0 - 3BB V GA 3BC - 3BF Reser v ed (parallel por t/no EPP suppor t) 3C0 - 3DF V GA 3E0 - 3E1 PC Card controller in CPU 3E2 - 3E3 Unused 3E8 - 3EF Inter nal modem 3F0 - 3F7 âAâ diskette controller 3F8 - 3FF Ser ial por t (COM1/def ault) CF8 - CFB PCI configuration inde x register (PCIDIV O-1) CFC - CFF PCI configuration data register (PCIDIV O-1) T able 6-11 System I/O Addresses (Continued)
6â18 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Spe cificat ion s T able 6-12 System Memory Map Size Memory Ad dress System Function 640 KB 00000000-0009FFFF Base memor y 128 KB 000A0000-000BFFFF Video memor y 48 KB 000C0000-000CBFFF Video BIOS 160 KB 000C8000-000E7FFF Unused 64 KB 000E8000-000FFFFF System BIOS 15 MB 00100000-00FFFFFF Extended memor y 58 MB 01000000-047FFFFF Super e xtended memor y 58 MB 04800000-07FFFFFF Unused 2 MB 08000000-080FFFFF Video memor y (direct access) 4 GB 08200000-FFFEFFFF Unused 64 KB FFFF0000-FFFFFFFF System BIOS
Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide Aâ1 A Sc r e w Li sting This appendix provides specif ication and reference information for the scre ws used in the computer . All screws listed in this appendix are a v ailable in the Scre w Kit, spare part number 416419-001.
Aâ2 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Scr e w Listi ng Philli ps P M3 . 0Ã3 . 0 Scr ew Locations Ta b l e A - 1 Phillips PM3.0Ã3.0 Screw Color Qty . Length Thread Head Width Black 4 3.0 mm 3.0 mm 5.0 mm Where used: 4 screws that secure the hard driv e fram e to the hard driv e (documented in Section 5.4 ) mm
Scr ew L isti ng Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide Aâ3 Phill ips P M 2 .0Ã5 .0 Capti ve Sc r e w Locations Ta b l e A - 2 Phillips PM2.0Ã5.0 Captive Screw Color Qty . Length Thread Head Width Black 4 5.0 mm 2.0 mm 5.0 mm Where used: 1 T wo scre ws that secure the hard driv e cov e r to the computer (scre ws are captured on the cov er by C clips; documented in Section 5.4 ) 2 One scre w that secures the memor y module compar tment cov er to the computer (screw is captured on th e co ver b y a C clip; documented in Section 5.7 ) 3 One scre w that secures the Bluetooth module cov er to the computer (scre w is captured on the cov er by a C clip; documented in Section 5.8 ) mm
Aâ4 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Scr e w Listi ng Phillips P M2 .5Ã13 . 0 Ca pti ve S c r e w L ocation Ta b l e A - 3 Phillips PM2.5Ã13.0 Captive Spring-Loaded Screw Color Qty . Length Thread Head Width Silv er 1 13.0 mm 2.5 mm 6.0 mm Where used: One screw that secures the hard driv e to the computer (screw is captured on the cov er by a C clip; documented in Section 5.4 ) mm
Scr ew L isti ng Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide Aâ5 T orx8 T8M2 . 5Ã4. 0 Sc r e w L ocati on Ta b l e A - 4 T orx8 T8M2.5Ã4.0 Screw Color Qty . Length Thread Head Width Black 13 4.0 mm 2.5 mm 5.0 mm Where used: One screw that secures the optical dr iv e to the computer (documented in Section 5.6 ) mm
Aâ6 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Scr e w Listi ng T orx8 T8M2 . 5Ã4. 0 Sc r e w L ocati ons Ta b l e A - 4 T orx8 T8M2.5Ã4.0 Screw (Continued) Color Qty . Length Thread Head Width Black 13 4.0 mm 2.5 mm 5.0 mm Where used: 5 screws that secure the top co ve r to the computer (documented in Section 5.19 ) mm
Scr ew L isti ng Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide Aâ7 T orx8 T8M2 . 5Ã4. 0 Sc r e w L ocati ons Ta b l e A - 4 T orx8 T8M2.5Ã4.0 Screw (Continued) Color Qty . Length Thread Head Width Black 13 4.0 mm 2.5 mm 5.0 mm Where used: 1 T wo scre ws that secure the system bo ard to the computer (documented in Section 5.21 ) 2 Three screws that secure the sys tem board fr ame to the computer (documented in Section 5.22 ) mm
Aâ8 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Scr e w Listi ng T orx8 T8M2 . 5Ã4. 0 Sc r e w L ocati ons Ta b l e A - 4 T orx8 T8M2.5Ã4.0 Screw (Continued) Color Qty . Length Thread Head Width Black 13 4.0 mm 2.5 mm 5.0 mm Where used: 2 screws that secure the USB/audio bo ard to the computer (documented in Section 5.24 ) mm
Scr ew L isti ng Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide Aâ9 Philli ps P M2 .0Ã3 .0 Sc r e w Locations Ta b l e A - 5 Phillips PM2.0Ã3.0 Screw Color Qty . Length Thread Head Width Silv er 4 3.0 mm 2.0 mm 5.0 mm Where used: 2 scre ws that secure the optical dr iv e brac k et to the optical drive (documented in Section 5.6 ) mm
Aâ10 Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide Scr e w Listi ng Phillips P M2 .0Ã3 . 0 Capti ve S cr e w Locati ons Ta b l e A - 5 Phillips PM2.0Ã3.0 Screw (Continued) Color Qty . Length Thread Head Width Silv er 4 3.0 mm 2.0 mm 5.0 mm Where used: 2 captiv e screws that secure the f an as sembly to the computer (documented in Section 5.10 ) mm
Scr ew L isti ng Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide Aâ11 Phillips P M1. 5Ã3 . 0 Scr ew L ocations Ta b l e A - 6 Phillips PM1.5Ã3.0 Screw Color Qty . Length Thread Head Width Silv er 2 3.0 mm 1.5 mm 5.0 mm Where used: 2 screws that secure the Bluetooth mo dule to the Bluetooth module co v er (documented in Section 5.8 ) mm
Aâ12 Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide Scr e w Listi ng T orx8 T8M2 .5Ã10. 0 Sc r e w L ocations Ta b l e A - 7 T orx8 T8M2.5Ã10.0 Screw Color Qty . Length Thread Head Width Black 20 10.0 mm 2.5 mm 5.0 mm Where used: 1 T wo scre ws that secure the k eyboa rd to the computer (documented in Section 5.9 ) 2 One scre w that secures the T ouchP ad to the computer (documented in Section 5.15 ) 3 F our scre ws that secure the displa y assembly to the computer (documented in Section 5.18 ) mm
Scr ew L isti ng Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide Aâ13 T orx8 T8M2 .5Ã10. 0 Sc r e w L ocations Ta b l e A - 7 T orx8 T8M2.5Ã10.0 Screw (Continued) Color Qty . Length Thread Head Width Black 20 10.0 mm 2.5 mm 5.0 mm Where used: 2 screws that secure the displa y assemb ly to the computer (documented in Section 5.18 ) mm
Aâ14 Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide Scr e w Listi ng T orx8 T8M2 .5Ã10. 0 Sc r e w L ocations Ta b l e A - 7 T orx8 T8M2.5Ã10.0 Screw (Continued) Color Qty . Length Thread Head Width Black 20 10.0 mm 2.5 mm 5.0 mm Where used: 11 screws that secure the top co v er to the computer (documented in Section 5.19 ) mm
Scr ew L isti ng Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide Aâ15 Phillips P M2 .5Ã7 . 0 Ca pti v e Sc r e w L ocations Ta b l e A - 8 Phillips PM2.5Ã7.0 Captive Screw Color Qty . Length Thread Head Width Silv er 2 7.0 mm 2.5 mm 5.0 mm Where used: 2 captiv e screws that secure the f an as sembly to the computer (documented in Section 5.10 ) mm
Aâ16 Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide Scr e w Listi ng Phillips P M2 .0Ã8. 0 Capti ve Sc r ew L ocations Ta b l e A - 9 Phillips PM2.0Ã8.0 Captive Screw Color Qty . Length Thread Head Width Silv er 4 8.0 mm 2.0 mm 5.0 mm Where used: 4 captiv e screws that secu re the heat sink to the computer (documented in Section 5.11 ) mm
Scr ew L isti ng Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide Aâ17 Phillips P M2 .0Ã4. 0 Scr e w Locati ons T able A-10 Phillips PM2.0Ã4.0 Screw Color Qty . Length Thread Head Width Silv er 2 4.0 mm 2.0 mm 5.0 mm Where used: 2 screws that secure the Mini Card mo dule to the computer (documented in Section 5.16 ) mm
Aâ18 Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide Scr e w Listi ng Philli ps P M2 .0Ã2 . 0 Scr ew Locations T able A-11 Phillips PM2.0Ã2.0 Screw Color Qty . Length Thread Head Width Black 5 2.0 mm 2.0 mm 5.0 mm Where used: 3 screws that secure the s witch co v er to the computer (documented in Section 5.17 ) mm
Scr ew L isti ng Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide Aâ19 Philli ps P M2 .0Ã2 . 0 Scr ew Locations T able A-11 Phillips PM2.0Ã2.0 Screw (Continued) Color Qty . Length Thread Head Width Black 5 2.0 mm 2.0 mm 5.0 mm Where used: 2 screws that secure the displa y asse mbly to the computer (documented in Section 5.18 ) mm
Aâ20 Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide Scr e w Listi ng Phillips P M2 .5Ã4. 0 Scr e w L ocations T able A-12 Phillips PM2.5Ã4.0 Screw Color Qty . Length Thread Head Width Black 2 4.0 mm 2.5 mm 5.0 mm Where used: 2 screws that secure the modem modu le to the computer (documented in Section 5.20 ) mm
Scr ew L isti ng Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide Aâ21 He x HM5 .0Ã12 . 0 Sc r ew L ock L ocatio ns T able A-13 Hex HM5.0Ã12.0 Scre w Lock Color Qty . Length Thread Head Width Silv er 4 12.0 mm 5.0 mm 5.0 mm Where used: 1 T wo scre w loc ks that secure the system board to the computer (documented in Section 5.21 ) 2 T wo scre w loc ks that secure the system board frame to the computer (documented in Section 5.22 ) mm
Aâ2 2 Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide Scr e w Listi ng T orx8 T8M2 . 5Ã6 . 0 Sc r e w Locations T able A-14 T orx8 T8M2.5Ã6.0 Screw Color Qty . Length Thread Head Width Black 4 6.0 mm 2.5 mm 5.0 mm Where used: 4 screws that secure the thermal pl ate to the computer (documented in Section 5.10 ) mm
Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide Bâ1 B Soft w are B ac k u p and Rec o v er y Back up HP Backup and Recov ery Manager provides se veral w ays to back up the system and to recov er optimal system functionality . â HP installed dri v ers, utilities, a nd applications can be copied to a CD or to a D VD using HP Backup and Recov ery Manager . â Formatted D VD±R W discs and D VD±R W double-layer discs are not compatible with HP Backup and Recov ery Manager . â The computer must be connected to external po wer before you perform backup and recov ery procedures. Safeguarding Y our Da ta T o safeguard your documents, store personal f iles in the My Documents folder and periodically create a backup copy of the folder .
Bâ2 Maintenance and Se rvi ce Guide So ftwar e Bac k up and R eco v ery B ac kin g Up t he S y stem Using HP Backup and Restore Manager , you can â Back up specif ic files and folders. â Back up the entire system. â Back up modif ications since your last backup, using HP system restore points. â Schedule backups. Ba c king Up S pec ific Files or F o lders Y ou can back up specif ic files or folders to the hard dri ve, to an optional external hard dri ve, or to discs. â This process will take se veral minutes, depending on the f ile size and the speed of the computer . T o back up specific f iles or folders: 1. Select Start > All Pr ograms > HP Backup & Recovery > HP Backup and Recov ery Manager . 2. Click Next. 3. Click Back up to protect system settings and important data f iles , and then click Next . 4. Click Back up individual f iles and folders , and then click Next . The Backup W izard opens. 5. Click Next. 6. Click Backup selected f iles fr om most common locations (Recommended) . â or â Click Advanced Backup (Experienced users) to access adv anced f iltering techniques. 7. Click Next. 8. Follo w the on-screen instructions.
So ft w ar e Back up and R ecov er y Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide Bâ3 B ac king U p t he En tire Hard Driv e When you perform a complete backup of the hard dri v e, you are sa ving the full factory image, including the W indo ws operating system, software applications, and all personal f iles and folders. â A copy of the entire hard dri ve image can be stored on another hard dri ve, on a netw ork dri v e, or on recov ery discs that you create. â This process may take o v er an hour , depending on your computer speed and the amount of data being stored. T o back up your entire hard driv e: 1. Select Start > All Pr ograms > HP Backup & Recovery > HP Backup and Recov ery Manager . 2. Click Next. 3. Click Back up to protect system settings and important data f iles , and then click Next . 4. Click Back up entire hard dri ve , and then click Next . The âBack up entire hard diskâ page opens. 5. Click Next. 6. Select the location for the backup f iles, and then click Next . 7. Select the Protect data access with passw ord check box, and type your password in the Passw ord and Conf irm boxes. â This step is optional. If you do not want to password-protect your data access, clear the Protect data access with passw ord check box. 8. Click Next. 9. Follo w the on-screen instructions.
Bâ4 Maintenance and Se rvi ce Guide So ftwar e Bac k up and R eco v ery Ba c king U p Modifications M ad e to th e Sys t e m When you back up modif ications since your last backup, you are creating system recov ery points. This allows you to sa v e a snapshot of your hard dri v e at a specific point in time. Y ou can then recov er back to that point if you want to re verse subsequent changes made to your system. â The f irst system recov ery point, a snapshot of the entire image, is automatically created the f irst time you perform a backup. Subsequent recov ery points mak e a copy of changes made after that time. HP recommends that you create recov ery points â Before you add or extensi vely modify softw are or hardware. â Periodically , whene ver the system is performing optimally . â Recov ering to an earlier reco very point does not af fect data f iles or e-mails created since that recov e ry point. After you create a recov ery point, you are prompted to schedule subsequent recov ery points. Y ou can schedule recov ery points for a specif ic time or e vent in your system. T o create and schedule a system recovery point: 1. Select Start > All Pr ograms > HP Backup & Recovery > HP Backup and Recov ery Manager . 2. Click Next. 3. Click Back up to protect system settings and important data f iles , and then click Next . 4. Click Create or manage Reco very P oints , and then click Next . The âRecov ery Point Managerâ page opens. 5. Follo w the on-screen instructions.
So ft w ar e Back up and R ecov er y Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide Bâ5 Sc heduling Ba c k ups T o schedule backups: 1. Select Start > All Pr ograms > HP Backup & Recovery > HP Backup Scheduler . The âBackup Schedulerâ page opens. 2. Click Next. 3. Schedule system recov ery points at specific interv als (no w , daily , weekly , or monthly) or at specific e vents, such as at system start or when you dock to an optional docking station (select models only), by clicking one of the a vailable options. Click Next to further defi ne the settings. A summary of your system recov ery point settings is displayed. 4. Follo w the on-screen instructions. Rec o ver y HP Backup and Recov ery Manager analyzes the hard driv e and creates a dedicated hard dri v e rec ov ery partition on the hard dri v e large enough to store a cop y of the full factory image. Y ou can choose whether you want to store that cop y on the recov ery partition, on another dri v e, or on external reco v ery discs. â Before using HP Backup and Recov ery Manager , try repairing the system by running Microsoft W indows System Restore. For more information, select Start > Help and Support , and then search for âSystem Restore. â
Bâ6 Maintenance and Se rvi ce Guide So ftwar e Bac k up and R eco v ery HP Backup and Recov ery Manager allows you to â Cr eate reco very discs (highly r ecommended). The recov ery discs are used to start up your computer and to recov er the full factory image (operating system and software) in case of system f ailure or instability . â If you do not ha ve a CD or D VD burner , a copy of the entire hard dri ve image can be stored on another hard dri ve or on a network dri ve. â P erf orm a r ecov ery . Y ou can perform a full system recovery or recov er important files from the reco very partition on the hard dri ve, from another dri ve, or from reco very discs that you create. Creating Reco v er y Disc s (Hi ghly R ecommen ded) After setting up the computer for the f irst time, you can create a set of recov ery discs of the full factory image, using Recov ery Media Creator in the HP Backup and Recov ery Manager . The recov ery discs are used to start up (boot) the computer and recov er the operating system and software to factory settings in case of system failure or instability . Ã CA UTION: After y ou cr eate the r eco v ery discs, y ou can incr ease the amount of a v ailable space on the har d dri v e b y deleting the r e co v ery partition . Ho we v er , doing this is n o t r ecommended . If y ou delete this partition , y ou w ill los e an y info rmati on that is on the partition . â Only one set of recov ery discs can be created for this computer .
So ft w ar e Back up and R ecov er y Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide Bâ7 Before creating recov ery discs: â Obtain high-quality CD-R, D VD-R, or D VD R media, purchased separately . â Formatted D VD±R W discs and D VD±R W double-layer discs are not compatible with HP Backup and Recov ery Manager . â Number each disc before inserti ng it into the optical dri v e of the computer . â If necessary , you can cancel Recov ery Media Creator before you ha ve f inished creating the recov ery discs. The next time you open Recov ery Media Creator , you will be prompted to continue the disc creation process where you left of f. T o create a set of recovery discs: 1. Select Start > All Pr ograms > HP Backup & Recovery > HP Backup and Recov ery Manager . 2. Click Next. 3. Click Create factory softwar e recov ery CDs or D VDs to r ecover the system (Highly r ecommended) , and then click Next . The âRecov ery Media Creatorâ page opens. 4. Click Next. 5. Click Write to CD/D VD , and then click Next . 6. Follo w the on-screen instructions. Pe r f o r m i n g a R e c o ve r y P er forming a Reco v er y from the Reco v er y Dis cs T o perform a recovery from the reco very discs: 1. Back up all personal f iles. 2. Insert the f irst recov ery disc into the optical dri ve and restart the computer . 3. Follo w the on-screen instructions.
Bâ8 Maintenance and Se rvi ce Guide So ftwar e Bac k up and R eco v ery P erforming a Reco very from t he H ard Driv e There are 2 ways to initiate a reco v ery from the hard dri ve: â From within W indo ws. â From the recov ery partition. Initia ting a Reco v er y in Win do ws T o initiate a recovery in W indows: 1. Back up all personal f iles. 2. Select Start > All Pr ograms > HP Backup & Recovery > HP Backup and Recov ery Manager . 3. Click Next. 4. Click Recov er important f iles or the entir e system , and then click Next . 5. Click a recov ery option, and then click Next . â If you choose to recov er the system, the computer restarts and recov ery begins. 6. Follo w the on-screen instructions. Initia ting a Reco very from th e Hard Driv e Reco v er y P artition T o initiate a recovery from the hard dri ve reco very partition: 1. Back up all personal f iles. 2. Restart the computer , and then press f11 before the W indow s operating system loads. 3. Click a recov ery option, and then click Next . 4. Follo w the on-screen instructions.
Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide Câ1 C Dis pl a y Com pon ent Rec y c lin g à W ARN ING: The bac klight contains mer cury . Cauti on should be e xe r c ised w hen re mov ing and handling the backligh t to a vo id damaging this component and ca using e xposur e to the merc ur y . à CA UTION: The pr ocedure s in this appendi x can r esult in damage to displa y components . T he only components int ended fo r r ecy cling purpo ses ar e the liquid c r y stal displa y (L CD) panel and the backlight . Car eful handling should be e x er c ised w hen r emo v ing these components . â Materials Disposal This HP product contains mercury in the backlight in the display assembly that might require special handling at end-of-life. Disposal of mercury may be regulated because of en vironmental considerations. For disposal or rec ycling information, contact your local authorities or the Electronic Industries Alliance (EIA) at http://www .eiae.org .
Câ2 Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide Display C omponent R ecy cling This appendix provides disassembl y instructions for the display assembly . The display assembly must be disassembled to gain access to the backlight 1 and the liquid crystal display (LCD) panel 2. â Disassembly procedures dif fer from one display assembly to another . The procedures provided in this appendix are general disassembly instructions. Specif ic details, such as scre w sizes, quantities, and locations, and co mponent shapes and sizes, can v ary from one computer model to another .
Displa y Componen t Rec y cling Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide Câ3 Perform the follo wing steps to disassemble the display assembly: 1. Remov e all screw co vers 1 and scre ws 2 that secure the display bezel to the display assembly . R emo v ing the Displa y Bez el Sc re w Co v er s and Sc r e w s
Câ4 Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide Display C omponent R ecy cling 2. Lift up and out on the left and right inside edges 1 and the top and bottom inside edges 2 of the display bezel until the bezel disengages fro m the display assembly . 3. Remov e the display bezel 3 . R emo v ing the Displa y Bez el
Displa y Componen t Rec y cling Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide Câ5 4. Disconnect all display panel cables 1 from the display in verter and remo v e the in verter 2 . R emo v ing the Displa y Inv er ter
Câ6 Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide Display C omponent R ecy cling 5. Remov e all screws 1 that secure the display panel assembly to the display enclosure. 6. Remov e the display panel assembly 2 from the display enclosure. R emo v ing the Displa y P a nel As sembl y
Displa y Componen t Rec y cling Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide Câ7 7. T urn the display panel assembly upside do wn. 8. Remov e all screws that secure the display panel frame to the display panel. R emo v ing the Displa y P a nel F r ame s
Câ8 Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide Display C omponent R ecy cling 9. Use a sharp-edged tool to cut the tape 1 that secures the sides of the display panel to the display panel frame. 10. Remov e the display panel frame 2 from the display panel. R emo v ing the Displa y F r ame
Displa y Componen t Rec y cling Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide Câ9 11. Remov e the screws 1 that secure the backlight co ver to the display panel. 12. Lift the top edge of the backlight cov er 2 and swing it forward. 13. Remov e the backlight cover . R emo v ing the Bac klight C o v er
Câ10 Main tenance and Se rvi ce Guide Display C omponent R ecy cling 14. T urn the display panel right side up. 15. Remov e the backlight cables 1 from the clip 2 in the display panel. R eleasing the Bac kligh t Cable s
Displa y Componen t Rec y cling Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide Câ11 16. T urn the display panel upside do wn. 17. Remov e the backlight frame from the display panel. R emo v ing the Bac klight F r ame
Câ12 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Display C omponent R ecy cling à W ARN ING: The bac klight contains mer cury . Cauti on should be e xe r c ised w hen re mov ing and handling the backligh t to a vo id damaging this component and ca using e xposur e to the merc ur y . 18. Slide the backlight out of the backlight frame. R emo v ing the Bac klight
Displa y Componen t Rec y cling Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide Câ13 19. Disconnect the display cable 1 from the LCD panel. 20. Remov e the screws 2 that secure the LCD panel to the display rear panel. 21. Release the LCD panel 3 from the display rear panel. 22. Release the tape 4 that secures the LCD panel to the display rear panel. R eleasing the L CD P anel
Câ14 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Display C omponent R ecy cling 23. Remov e the LCD panel. R emo v ing the L CD P anel 24. Recycle the LCD panel and backlight.
Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide Dâ1 D Co nnec tor P in As signm en ts Ta b l e D - 1 A udio-Out (Headphone) Pin Signal Pin Signal 1 A udio out, left channel 3 Ground 2 A udio out, ri ght channel
Dâ2 Maintenance and Se rvi ce Guide Connec tor P in Assignments Ta b l e D - 2 A udio-In (Micr ophone) Pin Signal Pin Signal 1 A udio signal in 3 Ground 2 A udio signal in Ta b l e D - 3 Universal Serial Bus Pin Signal Pin Signal 1 5 VDC 3 Data 2 Data â 4 Ground
Connec tor P in Assignments Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide Dâ3 Ta b l e D - 4 S-Video-Out Pin Signal Pin Signal 1 S-VHS color (C) signal 5 TV -CD 2 Composite video signal 6 S-VHS intensity ground 3 S-VHS intensity (Y) signal 7 Composite video ground 4 S-VHS color ground
Dâ4 Maintenance and Se rvi ce Guide Connec tor P in Assignments Ta b l e D - 5 External Monitor Pin Signal Pin Signal 1 Red analog 9 5 VDC 2 Green analog 10 Ground 3 Blue analog 11 Monitor detect 4 Not connected 12 DDC 2B data 5 Ground 13 Horizontal sync 6 Ground analog 14 V er tical sync 7 Ground analog 15 DDC 2B clock 8 Ground analog
Connec tor P in Assignments Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide Dâ5 Ta b l e D - 6 RJ-11 (Modem) Pin Signal Pin Signal 1 Unused 4 Unused 2T i p 5U n u s e d 3 Ring 6 Unused
Dâ6 Maintenance and Se rvi ce Guide Connec tor P in Assignments Ta b l e D - 7 RJ-45 (Netw ork) Pin Signal Pin Signal 1 T ransmit 5 Un used 2 T ransmit â 6 Receiv e â 3 Receive 7 Unused 4 Unused 8 Unused
Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide Eâ1 E P o w er C ord Set Requirem ents 3-Con duc tor P o w er Cord Set The wide range input feature of the computer permits it to operate from any line v oltage from 100 to 120 or 220 to 240 volts A C. The po wer cord set included with the computer meets the requirements for use in the country where the equipment is purchased. Po wer cord sets for use in other countries must meet the requirements of the country where the computer is used.
Eâ2 Maintenance and Se rvic e Guide P ow er Cor d Set Requirements Gen eral R equiremen ts The requirements listed belo w are applicable to all countries. â The length of the po wer cord set must be at least 1.5 m (5.0 ft) and a maximum of 2.0 m (6.5 ft). â All po wer cord sets must be approv ed by an acceptable accredited agency responsible for e v aluation in the country where the po wer cord set will be used. â The po wer cord sets must ha ve a minimum current capacity of 10 amps and a nominal v oltage rating of 125 or 250 V A C, as required by each countryâ s po wer system. â The appliance coupler must meet the mechanical conf iguration of an EN 60 320/IEC 320 Standard Sheet C13 connector for mating with the ap pliance inlet on the back of the computer .
P ow er Co rd Set R equirements Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide Eâ3 Coun tr y-Spec ific Requirements 3-Conductor P ower Cor d Set Requirements Country/Region Accredited Ag ency Applicable Note Number A ustralia EANSW 1 Au s t r i a OVE 1 Belgium C EBC 1 Canada CSA 2 Denmark DEMK O 1 Finland FIMK O 1 F rance UTE 1 Ger many VDE 1 Italy IMQ 1 Jap a n ME T I 3 â NOTES: 1. The fle xible cord m ust be <HAR> T ype HO5VV -F , 3-conductor , 1.0 mm² conductor size . P ower cord set fittings (appliance coupler and w all plug) must bear the cer tification mark of the agency responsible f or ev aluation in the countr y where it will be used. 2. The fle xible cord m ust be T ype SPT -3 or equivalent, No . 18 A WG, 3-conductor . The wall plug must be a two-pole grounding type with a NEMA 5-15P (15 A, 125 V) or NEMA 6-15P (15 A, 250 V) configuration. 3. The appliance coupler , fle xible cord, and wall plug mu st bear a âTâ mar k and registration number in accordance with the J apanese Dentor i La w . The fle xib le cord must be T ype VCT or VCTF , 3-conductor , 1.00 mm² conductor size . The wall plug m ust be a two-po le grounding type with a J apanese Industrial Standard C8303 (7 A, 125 V) configuration.
Eâ4 Maintenance and Se rvic e Guide P ow er Cor d Set Requirements Ko r e a E K 4 The Netherlands KEMA 1 Norwa y NEMK O 1 P eopleâ s Republic of China CCC 5 Sweden SEMK O 1 Switzerland SEV 1 T aiwan BSMI 4 United Kingdom BSI 1 United States UL 2 â NOTES: 1. The fle xible cord m ust be <HAR> T ype HO5VV -F , 3-conductor , 1.0 mm² conductor size . P ower cord set fittings (appliance coupler and w all plug) must bear the cer tification mark of the agency responsible f or ev aluation in the countr y where it will be used. 2. The fle xible cord m ust be T ype SPT -3 or equivalent, No . 18 A WG, 3-conductor . The wall plug must be a two-pole grounding type with a NEMA 5-15P (15 A, 125 V) or NEMA 6-15P (15 A, 250 V) configuration. 3. The appliance coupler , fle xible cord, and wall plug mu st bear a âTâ mar k and registration number in accordance with the J apanese Dentor i La w . The fle xib le cord must be T ype VCT or VCTF , 3-conductor , 1.00 mm² conductor size . The wall plug m ust be a two-po le grounding type with a J apanese Industrial Standard C8303 (7 A, 125 V) configuration. 4. The fle xible cord m ust be T ype R VV , 3-conductor , 0.75 mm² conductor size . P ower cord set fittings (appliance co upler and w all plug) must bear the cer tification mar k of the agency resp onsible f or ev aluation in the countr y where it will be used. 5. The fle xible cord m ust be T ype VC TF , 3-conductor , 0.75 mm² conductor size . P ower cord set fittings (appliance coupler and w all plug) must bear the cer tification mar k of the agency respon sible f or e valuation in the country where it will be used. 3-Conductor P ower Cor d Set Requirements (Continued) Country/Region Accredited Ag ency Applicable Note Number
Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide Inde xâ1 In de x 1394 port 1â11 A AC adapter, spare part number 3â20 , 3â30 accessory battery connector 1â19 arrow keys 1â13 audio troubleshooting 2â21 audio-in jack location 1â8 pin assignments Dâ2 audio-out jack location 1â8 pin assignments Dâ1 B base enclosure, spare part number 3â13, 3â26 battery removal 5â5 spare part number 3â15, 3â22 , 5â5 battery bay 1â9 , 1â19 battery light 1â7 battery release latch 1â19 Bluetooth module removal 5â16 spare part number 3â13, 3â23 , 5â16 Bluetooth module cable, disconnecting 5â16 Bluetooth module cover illustrated 3â17 removal 5â16 bottom components 1â18 C cables, service considerations 4â2 caps lock key 1â13 caps lock light 1â15 carrying case, spare part number 3â20, 3â22 CMOS clearing 1â4 components bottom 1â18 front 1â6 keyboard 1â9, 1â12 left-side 1â10 rear 1â10 right-side 1â8 top 1â14 , 1â16
Inde xâ2 Main tenance and Serv ice Gui de Inde x computer feet illustrated 3â17 locations 5â10 Computer Setup Advanced Menu 2â4 Main Menu 2â2 overview 2â1 Security Menu 2â3 Tools Menu 2â4 computer specifications 6â1 connector pin assignments audio-in Dâ2 audio-out Dâ1 external monitor Dâ4 headphone Dâ1 microphone Dâ2 modem Dâ5 monitor Dâ4 network Dâ6 RJ-11 Dâ5 RJ-45 Dâ6 S-Video-out Dâ3 Universal Serial Bus (USB) Dâ2 connectors, service considerations 4â2 D design overview 1â20 Digital Media Slot 1â11 disassembly sequence chart 5â3 diskette drive OS loading problems 2â19 precautions 4â3 display assembly removal 5â45 spare part numbers 3â3, 3â27 , 5â45 display component recycling Câ1 display lid switch 1â17 display release button 1â7 docking connector 1â19 drive light 1â7 drives, preventing damage 4â3 DVD/CD-RW Combo Drive OS loading problems 2â20 precautions 4â3 removal 5â11 spare part number 3â13, 3â19 , 3â20 , 3â22 , 3â25 , 5â11 specifications 6â9 DVD±RW and CD-RW Combo Drive OS loading problems 2â20 precautions 4â3 removal 5â11 spare part number 3â13, 3â19 , 3â20 , 3â23 , 3â25 , 5â11 specifications 6â7 DVD-ROM drive OS loading problems 2â20 precautions 4â3 removal 5â11 spare part number 3â13, 3â19 , 3â20 , 3â22 , 3â25 , 5â11 specifications 6â11
Inde x Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide Inde xâ3 E electrostatic discharge 4â4, 4â8 exhaust vents 1â11 expansion product spare part number 3â20, 3â25 troubleshooting 2â14 external monitor port location 1â9 pin assignments Dâ4 External MultiBay II power cable and stand, spare part number 3â20, 3â22 External MultiBay II, spare part number 3â20, 3â22 F f1 to f12 keys 1â13 fan assembly removal 5â23 spare part number 3â7, 3â26 , 5â23 features 1â2 feet illustrated 3â17 locations 5â10 fingerprint reader 1â17 fingerprint reader board, spare part number 3â7 , 3â26 , 5â49 flowcharts, troubleshooting no audio 2â21, 2â22 no network/modem connection 2â26 no OS loading 2â15 no OS loading from diskette drive 2â19 no OS loading from hard drive 2â16, 2â17, 2â18 no OS loading from optical drive 2â20 no power 2â8, 2â10, 2â11 no video 2â12, 2â13 nonfunctioning device 2â23 nonfunctioning docking device 2â14 nonfunctioning keyboard 2â24 nonfunctioning pointing device 2â25 fn key 1â13 front components 1â6 G grounding equipment and methods 4â7 H hard drive OS loading problems 2â16 precautions 4â3 removal 5â6 spare part numbers 3â15, 3â19 , 3â20 , 3â23 , 3â25 , 3â27 , 3â30 , 5â6 specifications 6â6 hard drive bay 1â19 hard drive cover illustrated 3â17 removal 5â7 hard drive frame, removal 5â9
Inde xâ4 Main tenance and Serv ice Gui de Inde x headphone jack location 1â8 pin assignments Dâ1 heat sink removal 5â28 spare part number 3â7, 3â26 , 5â28 HP Docking Station, spare part number 3â20, 3â25 HP Extended Life Battery, spare part number 3â20, 3â22 I I/O address specifications 6â15 Info Center button 1â15 interrupt specifications 6â13 K keyboard removal 5â18 spare part numbers 3â3, 3â5 , 3â27 , 3â28 , 3â29 , 5â18 troubleshooting 2â24 keyboard components 1â9, 1â12 keypad keys 1â13 L left-side components 1â10 M mass storage devices, spare part numbers 3â18 memory map specifications 6â18 memory module removal 5â13, 5â33 spare part numbers 3â13, 3â25 , 3â26 , 3â30 , 5â13 , 5â33 memory module compartment 1â19 memory module compartment cover illustrated 3â17 removal 5â14 microphone 1â8 microphone jack location 1â8 pin assignments Dâ2 Mini Card module removal 5â39 spare part numbers 3â9, 3â11 , 3â23 , 3â24 , 3â25 , 5â39 Miscellaneous Plastics Kit (for use with docking device), spare part number 3â20, 3â23 modem cable, removal 5â64 modem jack location 1â10 pin assignments Dâ5 modem module removal 5â53 spare part number 3â13, 3â25 , 5â53 troubleshooting 2â26 monitor port location 1â9 pin assignments Dâ4
Inde x Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide Inde xâ5 N network jack location 1â10 pin assignments Dâ6 network, troubleshooting 2â26 nonfunctioning device, troubleshooting 2â14, 2â23 num lock key 1â13 num lock light 1â15 O optical drive location 1â8 OS loading problems 2â20 precautions 4â3 removal 5â11 spare part numbers 3â13, 3â19 , 3â20 , 3â22 , 3â25 , 5â11 specifications 6â7, 6â9, 6â11 optical drive bracket, removal 5â12 P packing precautions 4â5 password clearing 1â4 PC Card slot 1â11 PC Card slot bezel, illustrated 3â17 plastic parts 4â2 Plastics Kit contents 3â17 spare part number 3â7, 3â17 , 3â29 pointing device, troubleshooting 2â25 pointing stick 1â17 pointing stick buttons 1â17 pointing stick cable, disconnecting 5â22 power button 1â15 power connector 1â9 power cord set requirements Eâ2 spare part numbers 3â21, 3â22 power light 1â6 power management features 1â5 power, troubleshooting 2â8 presentation button 1â15 processor removal 5â31 spare part numbers 3â7, 3â25 , 5â31 R rear components 1â10 removal/replacement preliminaries 4â1 procedures 5â1 right-side components 1â8 RJ-11 jack location 1â10 pin assignments Dâ5 RJ-45 jack location 1â10 pin assignments Dâ6 RTC battery, removal 5â35 S Screw Kit, spare part number 3â21 , 3â29 , Aâ1
Inde xâ6 Main tenance and Serv ice Gui de Inde x security cable slot 1â10 serial connector module removal 5â65 spare part number 3â13, 3â26 , 5â65 serial number 3â1, 5â2 serial port 1â8 service considerations 4â2 smart card slot 1â11 speakers 1â17 specifications computer 6â1 DVD/CD-RW Combo Drive 6â9 DVD±RW and CD-RW Combo Drive 6â7 DVD-ROM drive 6â11 hard drive 6â6 I/O addresses 6â15 interrupts 6â13 memory map 6â18 optical drive 6â7, 6â9, 6â11 system DMA 6â12 static shielding materials 4â8 stringent security 1â4 S-Video-out jack location 1â10 pin assignments Dâ3 switch cover removal 5â42 spare part numbers 3â3, 3â26 , 5â42 system board removal 5â55 spare part number 3â13, 3â26 , 5â55 system board frame removal 5â62 spare part number 3â13, 3â26 , 5â62 system DMA 6â12 system memory map 6â18 T thermal paste, replacing 5â25 , 5â27 , 5â30 thermal plate removal 5â26 spare part number 3â7 , 3â26 tools required 4â1 top components 1â14, 1â16 top cover removal 5â49 spare part numbers 3â7, 3â26 , 3â30 , 5â49 TouchPad 1â17 removal 5â36 spare part numbers 3â5, 3â23 , 5â36 TouchPad cable, disconnecting 5â38 TouchPad left/right buttons 1â17 TouchPad scroll zone 1â17 transporting precautions 4â5 troubleshooting audio 2â21 Computer Setup 2â1 expansion product 2â14
Inde x Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide Inde xâ7 flowcharts 2â5 keyboard 2â24 modem 2â26 network 2â26 nonfunctioning device 2â14 , 2â23 OS loading 2â15 overview 2â1 pointing device 2â25 power 2â8 video 2â12 U Universal Serial Bus (USB) port location 1â8, 1â11 pin assignments Dâ2 unknown password 1â4 USB diskette drive, spare part number 3â20, 3â22 USB/audio board removal 5â67 spare part number 3â13, 3â26 , 5â67 V vents 1â19 video troubleshooting 2â12 volume buttons 1â15 W Windows applications key 1â13 Windows logo key 1â13 wireless button 1â15 wireless light 1â6, 1â15 workstation precautions 4â6
© Copyright 2006 He wlett-Packard Dev elopment Company , L.P . Microsoft and W indows are U.S. re gistered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. Intel and Core are tradem arks or registered trademarks of Intel Corporation or its subsidiaries in the United States and other countries. Bluetooth is a trademark o wned by its proprietor and used b y He wlett-Packard Compan y under license. SD Logo is a trademark of its proprietor . Jav a is a trademark of Sun Microsystems Inc. The information contained herein is su bject to change without notice. The only warranties for HP products and services are set forth in the express warranty statements accompan ying such products and services. Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty . HP shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein. Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide HP Compaq n w8440 Not ebook PC HP Co mpaq nc84 30 Notebook P C HP Co mpaq nx84 20 Notebook P C F irst E dition: June 2006 Document P ar t Nu mber : 4177 90 -001
Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide iii Cont e nt s 1 Product Description 1.1 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1â2 1.2 Resetting the Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1â4 1.3 Power Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1â5 1.4 External Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1â6 1.5 Design Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1â20 2 Troubleshooting 2.1 Computer Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2â1 Using Computer Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2â1 Selecting from the File Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2â2 Selecting from the Security Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2â3 Selecting from the Advanced Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2â4 Selecting from the Tools Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2â4 2.2 Troubleshooting Flowcharts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2â5
i v Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide Cont en ts 3 Illustrated Parts Catalog 3.1 Serial Number Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3â1 3.2 Computer Major Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3â2 3.3 Plastics Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3â16 3.4 Mass Storage Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3â18 3.5 Miscellaneous (Not Illustrated) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3â20 3.6 Sequential Part Number Listing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3â22 4 Removal and Replacement Preliminaries 4.1 Tools Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4â1 4.2 Service Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4â2 Plastic Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4â2 Cables and Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4â2 4.3 Preventing Damage to Removable Drives . . . . . . . . 4â3 4.4 Preventing Electrostatic Damage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4â4 4.5 Packaging and Transporting Precautions . . . . . . . . . 4â5 4.6 Workstation Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4â6 4.7 Grounding Equipment and Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4â7
Cont en ts Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide v 5 Removal and Replacement Procedures 5.1 Serial Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5â2 5.2 Disassembly Sequence Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5â3 5.3 Preparing the Computer for Disassembly . . . . . . . . . 5â5 5.4 Hard Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5â6 5.5 Computer Feet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5â10 5.6 Optical Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5â11 5.7 External Memory Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5â13 5.8 Bluetooth Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5â16 5.9 Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5â18 5.10 Fan Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5â23 5.11 Heat Sink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5â28 5.12 Processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5â31 5.13 Internal Memory Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5â33 5.14 RTC Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5â35 5.15 TouchPad. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5â36 5.16 Mini Card Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5â39 5.17 Switch Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5â42 5.18 Display Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5â45 5.19 Top Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5â49 5.20 Modem Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5â53 5.21 System Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5â55 5.22 System Board Frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5â62 5.23 Serial Connector Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5â65 5.24 USB/Audio Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5â67
v i Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide Cont en ts 6 Specifications A Screw Listing B Software Backup and Recovery C Display Component Recycling D Connector Pin Assignments E Power Cord Set Requirements Index
Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 1â1 1 Pr oduc t D esc ription The HP Compaq nw8440 Notebook PC, HP Compaq nc8430 Notebook PC, and HP Compaq nx8420 Notebook PC of fer adv anced modularity , Intel® Core⢠Duo processors, and extensi ve multimedia support. HP Compaq n w8440 Not ebook P C, HP Co mpaq nc84 30 Notebook P C, and HP Compaq nx8 4 20 Notebook PC
1â2 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Product D escr ipt ion 1.1 F e a t u r e s â The follo wing processors, v a rying b y computer model: â Intel Core Duo T2600 (2.17-GHz) â Intel Core Duo T2500 (2.00-GHz) â Intel Core Duo T2400 (1.83-GHz) â Intel Core Duo T2300 (1.66-GHz) â The follo wing displays are a v ailable, v arying by computer model: â 15.4-inch, WUXGA, TFT (1920 à 1200) with ov er 16.8 million colors with AntiGlare â 15.4-inch, WSXGA, TFT (1680 à 1050) with ov er 16.8 million colors with AntiGlare â 15.4-inch, WXGA , TFT (1440 à 900) with ov er 16.8 million colors with AntiGlare â 120-, 100-, 80-, and 60-GB high-capacity hard dri ve, v arying by computer model â 256-MB DDR2 synchronous DRAM (SDRAM) at 533 MHz and 667 MHz, expandable to 4.0 GB â Microsoft® W indo ws® XP Professional â Full-size W indo ws ke yboard with numeric ke ypad â T ouchPad and pointing stick pointing de vices, including a dedicated vertical scroll re gion (select models only) â Integrated 10 Base-T/100 Base-TX Ethernet local area network (LAN) netw ork interface card (NIC) with RJ-45 jack â Integrated high-speed 56K modem with RJ-11 jack
Product D escr ipt ion Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 1â3 â Integrated wireless support for Mini Card IEEE 802.11a/b/g or 802.11b/g W ireless LAN (WLAN) de vice â Support for one T ype I or T ype II PC Card slot, with support for both 32-bit (CardBus) and 16-bit PC Cards, v arying by computer model â External 90-watt A C adapter with 3-wire po wer cord â 8-cell Li-Ion battery â Stereo speakers â V olume up, v olume mute, and v olume do wn b uttons â Support for the follo wing optical dri v es: â D VD±R W and CD-R W Double-Layer Combo Driv e â D VD/CD-R W Combo Dri v e â D VD-R OM driv e â Connectors: â Accessory battery â Audio-in (microphone) â Audio-out (headphone) â Digital media slot â Docking connector â External monitor â IEEE 1394 â RJ-11 (modem) â RJ-45 (network) â S-V ideo-out â Smart Adapter po wer â Three Uni v ersal Serial Bus (USB) v . 2.0
1â4 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Product D escr ipt ion 1 .2 R eset tin g t he Com pu ter If the computer you are servicing has an unkno wn password, follo w the steps belo w to reset the password. These steps also clear CMOS. â The follo wing steps will not clear an unkno wn password if the stringent security option has been enabled in the BIOS. If stringent security is enabled, the system board must be replaced to reset an unkno wn password. Refer to Section 5.23, âSerial Connector Module, â for more information on replacing the system board. Before replacing the system board, perform the steps belo w to make sure stringent security has been properly enabled. Enabling stringent security provides enhanced protection for the po wer -on password and administrator password and other forms of po wer -on authorization. Stringent security is enabled/disabled by accessing the P a ssword Options menu in the Computer Setup utility . Refer to Section 2.1, âComputer Setup, â for more information. 1. Prepare the computer for disassembly (refer to Section 5.3, âPreparing the Computer for Disassembly , â for more information). Remov e the real-time clock (R TC) battery (refer to Section 5.14, âR TC Battery , â for more information on removing and replacing the R TC battery). 2. W ait approximately 5 minutes. 3. Replace the R TC battery and reassemble the computer . 4. Connect A C power to the computer . Do not reinsert an y batteries at this time. 5. T urn on the computer . All passwords and all CMOS settings ha v e been cleared.
Product D escr ipt ion Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 1â5 1. 3 P o w e r M a n a g e m e n t The computer comes with po wer management features that extend battery operating time and conserv e power . The computer supports the follo wing po wer management features: â Standby â Hibernation â Setting customization by the user â Hotke ys for setting the le ve l of performance â Battery calibration â Lid switch standby/resume â Po wer b utton â Adv anced Conf iguration and Po wer Management (A CPM) compliance
1â6 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Product D escr ipt ion 1 .4 Ex ternal C ompon ents The external components on the front of the computer are sho wn belo w and described in T able 1-1. F r ont Component s Ta b l e 1 - 1 Fr ont Components Item Component Function 1 Wireless light On: An integrat ed wireless de vice, such as a wireless local area network (LAN) device and/or a Bluetooth® de vice, is turned on. 2P o w e r l i g h t â On: The computer is on. â Blinking: The computer is in standby . â Blinking rapidly: An HP Smar t A C Adapter with a higher pow er rating should be connected. â Off: The computer is o ff or in hiber nation.
Product D escr ipt ion Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 1â7 3 Batter y light â Amber : A batter y is charging. â Green: A batter y is close to full charge capacity . â Blinking amber : A batter y that is the only av ailable po wer source has reached a low-battery condition. When the batter y reaches a critical lo w-batter y condition, the batter y light begins blinking more quickly . â Off: If the computer is connected to an e xter nal po wer source, the light is turned off when all batteries in the computer are fully charged. If the computer is not connected to an e xternal power source , the light is tur ned off until the battery reaches a low-battery condition. 4D r i v e l i g h t â Blinking green: The hard driv e or optical drive is being accessed. â Amber : HP Mobile Data Protection has temporarily par k ed the hard drive. 5 Displa y release latch Opens the computer . Ta b l e 1 - 1 Fr ont Components (Continued) Item Component Function
1â8 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Product D escr ipt ion The external components on the right side of the computer are sho wn belo w and described in T able 1-2. R igh t -Si de Com ponents Ta b l e 1 - 2 Right-Side Components Item Component Function 1A u d i o - o u t (headphone) jack Produces computer sound when connected to optional pow er stereo speakers , headphones, ear b uds, a headset, or tele vision audio . 2 Inter nal microphone Records sound 3A u d i o - i n (microphone) jack Connects an optional computer headset microphone, stereo arr a y microphone, or monaural microphone . 4 USB por ts (2) Connect USB 1.1- and 2.0-compliant de vices to the computer using a standard USB cable , or connect an optional Exter nal MultiBa y II to the computer . The MultiBa y II must also be connected to an e x ternal pow er source. 5 Optical drive Suppor ts an opti cal disc. The type of optical drive v ar ies by model. 6 Serial por t Connects an optional serial device .
Product D escr ipt ion Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 1â9 The external components on the rear panel of the computer are sho wn belo w and described in T able 1-3. Re ar P a ne l Co mp o n en t s T able 1-3 Rear P anel Components Item Component Function 1 Batter y ba y Holds a batter y . 2 Smar t adapter power connector Connects an A C adap ter or an optional pow er adapter . 3 Exter nal monitor por t Connects an optional V GA e xter nal monitor or projector .
1â10 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Product D escr ipt ion The external components on the left side of the computer are sho wn belo w and described in T able 1-4. Left -Side Components Ta b l e 1 - 4 Left-Side Components Item Component Function 1 Security cable slot Attaches an op tional security cable to the computer . Ã Security solutions are designed to act as deterrents. These deterrents ma y not pre v ent a product from being mishandled or stolen. 2 RJ-45 (network) jack Connects an optional network cable . 3 RJ-11 (modem) jack Conn ects the modem cable . 4 S-Video-out jack Connects an optional S-Video de vice, such as a tele vision, VCR, camcorder , projector , or video capture card.
Product D escr ipt ion Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 1â11 5 Exhaust v ent Pro vides airflow to cool internal components. à T o pre v ent ov erheating, do not obstruct vents . Use the computer only a hard, flat surf ace. Do not allo w a hard surf ace, such as an adjoining printer , or a soft surf ace , such as pillows or thic k r ugs or clothing, to blo ck ai r fl ow . 6 1394 por t Connects an optional 1394a de vice such as a scanner , digital camera, or digital camcorder . 7 USB por t Connects USB 1.1- and 2.0-compliant de vices to the computer using a standard USB cable , or connects an optional Exter nal MultiBa y II to the computer . The MultiBa y II must also be connected to an e xter nal pow er source . 8 Smar t card slot Suppor ts op tional smar t cards and Ja v a⢠Cards. 9 PC Card slot Suppor ts optional T ype I or T ype II 32-bit (CardBus) or 16-bit PC Cards. 10 Digital Media Slot Suppor ts Secure Digital (SD) Memor y Cards and MultiMediaCards. Ta b l e 1 - 4 Left-Side Components (Continued) Item Component Function
1â12 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Product D escr ipt ion The standard ke yboard components of the computer are sho wn belo w and described in T able 1-5. St andar d K ey board C ompone nts
Product D escr ipt ion Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 1â13 T able 1-5 Standar d Ke yboar d Components Item Component Function 1 f1 to f12 ke ys (12) P erf orm system and application tasks. When combined with the fn key , s ever al ke ys and buttons perf or m additional tasks as hotk eys . 2 caps lock ke y Enables caps loc k and turns on the caps loc k light. 3 fn ke y Ex ecutes frequently used system functions when pressed in combination with a function ke y or the esc key . 4 Windows logo k e y In Window s , displa ys the Windows Star t menu. 5W i n d o w s applications ke y In Windows , displa ys a shor tcut menu f or items beneath the pointer . 6 Arrow k e ys Mov es the cursor around the screen. 7 K eypad k eys In Windows , can be used lik e the ke ys on an e xter nal numeric k eypad. 8 num lock ke y Enables n umeric lock, tur ns on the embedded numeric ke ypad, and tur ns on the num loc k light.
1â14 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Product D escr ipt ion The computer top components are sho wn belo w and described in T able 1-6. T op Components , P ar t 1
Product D escr ipt ion Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 1â15 T able 1-6 T op Components Item Component Function 1 P ower b utton When the computer is: â Off , press to turn on the computer . â On, briefly press to initiate hiber nation. â In standb y , briefly press to resume from standby . â In hiber nation, briefly press to restore from hiber nation. If the system has st opped responding and Windows shutdo wn procedures cannot be used, press and hold f or 5 seconds to tur n off the computer . 2 Inf o Center b utton Launches In f o Center , which enables y ou to open v arious software solutions. 3 Wireless button (with wireless light) T ur ns the wireless functionality on or off , but does not create a wireless connection. â To establish a wireless connection, a wireless network must already be set up. 4 Presentation button Star ts the presentation feature . 5 Caps lock light On: caps lock is on. 6 Num loc k light On: num lock or the numeric ke ypad is on. 7 V olume mute b utton Mutes or restores speaker v olume. 8 V olume down b utton decreases speaker v olume. 9 V olume up button Increases speaker v olume.
1â16 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Product D escr ipt ion The computer top components are sho wn belo w and described in T able 1-7. T op Components , P ar t 2
Product D escr ipt ion Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 1â17 T able 1-7 T op Components Item Component Function 1 Displa y lid s witch â If the computer is closed while on, tur ns off the displa y . â If the computer is opened while in standby , tur ns on the computer (resumes from standby). 2 P ointing stick (select models only) Mov es the pointer and selects or activates items on the screen. 3 Stereo speakers (2) P roduce stereo sound. 4 T ouchP ad Mov es the pointer and selects or activates items on the screen. Ca n be set to perf orm other mouse functions, such as scrolling, selecting, and double-clic king. 5 T ouchP ad buttons Function like the left, middle , and right buttons on an e xter nal mouse. 6 Finger print reader Allo ws a finger print logon to Windows instead of using a pass word. 7 T ouchP ad scroll zone Scrolls up or down. 8 P ointing stick b uttons (select models only) Function lik e the le ft, middle, and right buttons on an e xter nal mouse.
1â18 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Product D escr ipt ion The external components on the bottom of the computer are sho wn belo w and described in T able 1-8. Bot tom Component s
Product D escr ipt ion Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 1â19 Ta b l e 1 - 8 Bottom Components Item Component Function 1 Batter y ba y Holds the batter y . 2 Batter y release latches (2) Secur e the batter y in the batter y ba y . 3 Accessor y batter y connector Connects an optional HP Ultra-Capacity Batter y or HP Extended Lif e Batter y . 4 Memor y module compar tment Contains one memor y slot that suppor ts replaceable memory modules. 5 Hard drive ba y Holds the primar y hard dr iv e. 6 Doc king connector Connects the computer to an optional doc king de vice. 7 Exhaust v ent Provides airflo w to cool internal components. Ã T o pre v ent ov erheating, do not obstruct vents . Use the computer only a hard, flat surf ace. Do not allow a hard surf ace, such as an adjoining printer , or a soft surf ace, such as pillo ws or thic k rugs or clothing, to bloc k airflow .
1â20 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Product D escr ipt ion 1. 5 D e s i g n O v e r v i e w This section presents a design ov erview of k ey parts and features of the computer . Refer to Chapter 3, âIllustrated Parts Catalog, â to identify replacement parts, and Chapter 5, âRemo v al and Replacement Procedures, â for disassembly steps. The system board provides the follo wing device connections: â Audio â Digital Media Slot â Display â Hard dri v e â Intel Core Duo processors â K e yboard, pointing stick, and T ouchP ad â Memory modules â Mini Card module â Optical dri v e â PC Card â Smart Adapter A C adapter â Smart card à CA UTION: T o pr operl y ventilate the com puter , allo w at least a 7 .6 -cm (3-inc h) c lear ance on the left and r igh t sides o f the comput er . The computer uses an electric fan for v e ntilation. The fan is controlled by a temperature sensor and is designed to turn on automatically when high temperature conditions exist. These conditions are af fected b y high external temperatures, system po wer consumption, po wer management/battery conserv ation conf igurations, battery fast char gi ng, and software. Exhaust air is displaced through the ventilation grill located on the left side of the computer .
Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 2â1 2 T r oubl eshooting à W ARN ING: Only author iz ed tec hnic ians tr ained b y HP should r epair this equipmen t . All tr ouble shooting and r epair pr ocedur es ar e detailed to allo w onl y subass embly-/module-lev el r epair . Becaus e of the comple x ity of the indi v idual boar ds and subas sembli es , do not attempt to mak e repair s at the component le vel or modif ications to an y print ed w ir ing boar d. Im pr oper r epairs can c r eate a safety ha z ard . An y indicati on of component r eplacement or pr inted w iring boar d modif icati on may v oid an y war r anty or ex c hange allo wance s. 2. 1 C omp uter Setu p Computer Setup is a system information and customization utility that can be used e ven when the operating system is not w orking or will not load. This utility includes settings that are not a v ailable in W indow s. Using C ompu ter Setup Information and settings in Computer Setup are accessed from the Main, Security , Adv anced, or T ools menus: 1. T urn on or restart the computer . Press f10 while the F10 = R OM-Based Setup message is displayed in the lo wer -left corner of the screen. â T o change the language, use the cursor control keys to na vigate to the Adv anced menu. â T o view na vigation information, press f1 . â T o return to the Computer Setup menu, press esc .
2â2 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de T r oublesh ooting 2. Select the Main , Security , Advanced , or T ools menu. 3. T o close Computer Setup and restart the computer: â Select Exit > Exit Sa ving Changes , and then press enter . â or â â Select Exit > Exit Discarding Changes , and then press enter . â or â â Select Exit > Load Setup Defaults, and then press enter . 4. When you are prompted to conf irm your action, press f10 . Sele c ti ng fr om the F ile Menu Ta b l e 2 - 1 File Menu Select T o Do This System Inf or mation â Change the system time and system date. â Vie w identification inf or mation about the computer . â Vie w specification inf or mation about the processor , memor y and cache size , and system ROM.
T r oubleshooting Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 2â3 Selec ting fr om t he Securit y Menu Ta b l e 2 - 2 Security Menu Select T o Do This Administrator P ass word Enter , chan ge, or delete an Administr ator pass word. P ower-on P ass word Enter , change, or delete a pow er-on pass word. DriveLoc k P ass words Enable/disab le Dr iveLoc k; change a Dr iv eLock user or master pass word. â DriveLock Settings are accessible only when you enter Comput er Setup by turning on (not restarting) the computer. P assw ord Options (P assw ord options can be selected only when a pow er-on pass word has been set.) Enable/disab le â QuickLoc k. â QuickLoc k on Standby . â QuickBlank. â To enable QuickLock on Standby or QuickBlank, you must first enable QuickLock. De vice Security Enable/disab le â Diskette driv e star tup.* â CD-ROM or disk ette star tup . â Settings for a DVD-ROM can be entered in the CD-ROM field. *Not applicable to SuperDisk LS-120 driv es.
2â4 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de T r oublesh ooting Selec ting from th e Ad v an ced Menu Selec ting fr om t he T ools Menu Ta b l e 2 - 3 Adv anced Menu Select T o Do This Language Change the Comp uter Setup language. Boot Order Enable/disab le Mult iBoot, which sets a star tup sequence that can includ e most bootab le de vices and media in the system. Accessibility Options Allows electron ic and inf or mation technolog y to be accessib le to people with varying ranges of abilities. Video Memor y Displa ys the amount of video memor y a vailab le on the computer . Ta b l e 2 - 4 To o l s M e n u Select T o Do This Hard Drive Self T est Run a quic k co mprehensiv e self test on hard drives in the system that suppor t the test f eatures.
T r oubleshooting Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 2â5 2.2 T roubl eshooting Flo wc h ar ts Ta b l e 2 - 5 T roubleshooting Flo wch ar ts Overview Flowchart Description 2.1 âFlowchar t 2.1âInitial T roub leshootingâ 2.2 âFlowchar t 2.2âNo P ow er , P ar t 1â 2.3 âFlowchar t 2.3âNo P ow er , P ar t 2â 2.4 âFlowchar t 2.4âNo P ow er , P ar t 3â 2.5 âFlowchar t 2.5âNo P ow er , P ar t 4â 2.6 âFlowchar t 2.6âNo Video , P ar t 1â 2.7 âFlowchar t 2.7âNo Video , P ar t 2â 2.8 âFlowchar t 2.8âNonfunctioning Do c king De vice (if applicab le)â 2.9 âFlowchar t 2.9âNo Operating System (OS) Loadingâ 2.10 âFlowchar t 2.10âNo OS Loading, Hard Drive , P ar t 1â 2.11 âFlowchar t 2.11âNo OS Loading, Hard Drive , P ar t 2â 2.12 âFlowchar t 2.12âNo OS Loading, Hard Drive , P ar t 3â 2.13 âFlowchar t 2.13âNo OS Loading, Disk ette Dr iv eâ
2â6 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de T r oublesh ooting Flowchart Description 2.14 âFlowchar t 2.14âNo OS Loading, Optical Driveâ 2.15 âFlowchar t 2.15âNo A udio , P ar t 1â 2.16 âFlowchar t 2.16âNo A udio , P ar t 2â 2.17 âFlowchar t 2.17âNonfunctioning De viceâ 2.18 âFlowchar t 2.18âNonfunctioning K eyboardâ 2.19 âFlowchar t 2.19âNonfunctioning P ointing De viceâ 2.20 âFlowchar t 2.20âNo Network/Modem Connectionâ Ta b l e 2 - 5 T roubleshooting Flo wcharts Overview (Continued)
T r oubleshooting Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 2â7 Flo wc h art 2. 1âInitial T roub leshooting Connecting to network or modem? Begin troubleshooting. Is there power? Is the OS loading? Is there video? (no boot) Is there sound? Beeps, LEDs, or error messages? Keyboard/ pointing device working? Go to âFlowchar t 2.17âNonfunc- tioning De vice. â Go to âFlowchar t 2.2âNo P ower , Pa r t 1 . â Go to âFlowchar t 2.6âNo Video , Pa r t 1 . â All drives working? Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y N N N N N End N N N Go to âFlowchar t 2.9âNo Operating System (OS) Loading. â Go to âFlowchar t 2.15âNo A udio , Pa r t 1 . â Go to âFlowchart 2.18âNonfunc- tioning K e yboardâ or âFlowchart 2.19âNonfunc- tioning P ointing De vice. â Check LED board, speaker connections. Go to âFlowchar t 2.20âNo Network/Modem Connection. â
2â8 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de T r oublesh ooting Flo wc h art 2.2âN o P o w er , P ar t 1 1. Reset the power cables in the docking device and at the AC outlet. 2. Be sure the AC power source is active. 3. Be sure that the power strip is working. Done Remove from docking device (if applicable). Po we r u p on batter y power? Po we r u p on AC power? Power up in docking device? Po we r up on batter y power? Po we r u p in docking device? Done Reset power .* Reset power .* Po we r u p on AC power? N Y Y N N Y N N Y Y YN 1. On select models, there is a separate reset button. 2. On select models, th e computer can be reset using the standby switch and either the lid switch or the main power s witch. *NOTES Go to âFlowchart 2.4âNo P ower , Pa r t 3 . â Go to âFlowchar t 2.3âNo P ower , Pa r t 2 . â Go to âFlowchar t 2.8âNonfunctioning Docking De vice (if applicable). â No power (power LED is off).
T r oubleshooting Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 2â9 Flo wc h art 2.3âNo P o w er , P ar t 2 Continued from âFlowchar t 2.2âNo P ower , Pa r t 1 . â Visually check for debris in batter y socket and cl ean if necessary . Done N Y Po we r o n ? Check batter y by recharging it, moving it to another computer , or replacing it. Po we r o n ? Done Y Replace power supply (if applicable). N Po we r o n ? Done Y N Go to âFlowchart 2.4âNo P ower , Pa r t 3 . â
2â10 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de T r oublesh ooting Flo wc h art 2.4âN o P o w er , P ar t 3 Continued from âFlowchart 2.3âNo P ower , Pa r t 2 . â Reseat AC adapter in computer and at po wer sou rc e. Internal or external AC adapter? Done Done Done Done Po we r o n ? Po we r o n ? Po we r o n ? Plug directly into AC outlet. Po we r L E D on? Po we r o u tl et active? T r y different outlet. Replace external AC adapter . Replace power cord. Y N Y Y Y Y N N N N External Internal Go to âFlowchar t 2.5âNo P ower , Pa r t 4 . â
T r oubleshooting Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 2â11 Flowc ha r t 2.5 âN o P o w er , P a rt 4 Y N Continued from âFlowchar t 2.4âNo P ower , Pa r t 3 . â Reseat loose components and boards and replace damaged items. Open computer . Loose or damaged parts? Y Close computer and retest. Po we r on ? Done N Replace the following items (if applicable). Check computer operation after each replacement: 1. Internal DC-DC converter* 2. Internal AC adapter 3. Processor board* 4. System board* *NOTE: Replace these items as a set to prevent shorting out among components.
2â12 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de T r oublesh ooting Flo wc h art 2.6âN o Video, P ar t 1 A N Stand-alone or docking device? No video. Replace the following one at a time. T est after each replacement. 1. Cable between computer and computer display (if applicable) 2. Display 3. System board Internal or external display*? Adjust brightness. Video OK? Done Docking Device Internal Stand-alone External Adjust brightness. Video OK? Done Y Press lid swi tc h to en su re operation. Video OK? Done Y N Video OK? Done Done N Check for bent pins on cable. Tr y another display . Internal and external video OK? Replace system board. YY N N *NOTE: T o change from internal to external display , use the hotkey combination. Y Go to âFlowchar t 2.7âNo Video , Pa r t 2 . â
T r oubleshooting Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 2â13 Flo wc h art 2.7âN o Video, P ar t 2 Y N Continued from âFlowchart 2.6âNo Video , Pa r t 1 . â Done Adjust external monitor display . Video OK? Adjust display brightness. Video OK? Video OK? Done Done Check that computer is properly seated in docking device, for bent pins on cable, and for monitor connection. Go to âA â in âFlowchart 2.6âNo Video , Pa r t 1 . â Check brightness of external monitor . T r y another external monitor . Internal and external video OK? Go to âFlowchar t 2.8âNonfunctioning Docking De vice (if applicable). â Y Y Y N N N Remove computer from docking device, if connected.
2â14 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de T r oublesh ooting F lo wch a rt 2 .8 â No nf un ct i o n in g D ock i ng De v ic e (i f appl icable) Y N Reset power cord in docking device and power outlet. N T est replacement docking device with new computer . Check voltage setting on docking device. Reset monitor cable connector at docking device. Reinstall computer into docking device. Docking device operating? Docking device operating? Replace docking device. Done Done Y Nonfunctioning docking device.
T r oubleshooting Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 2â15 Flo wc h art 2.9âN o Opera ting S y s tem (OS) Loadin g No OS loading from hard drive, go to âFlowchart 2.10âNo OS Loading, Hard Drive , P ar t 1. â Reset power cord in docking device and power outlet. No OS loading.* *NOTE: Before beginning troubleshooting, always check cable connections, cable ends, and drives for bent or damaged pins. No OS loading from diskette drive, go to âFlowchart 2.13âNo OS Loading, Diskette Driv e. â No OS loading from CD-ROM or DVD-ROM drive, go to âFlowchar t 2.14âNo OS Loading, Optical Drive. â No OS loading from network, go to âFlowchar t 2.20âNo Network/Modem Connection. â
2â16 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de T r oublesh ooting Flo wc h art 2. 1 0âN o OS Loadin g , Hard Driv e, Pa r t 1 Go to âFlowchart 2.17âNonfunctioning De vice. â Y Done N OS not loading from hard drive. Nonsystem disk message? Go to âFlowchar t 2.11âNo OS Loading, Hard Drive, P ar t 2. â Reseat external hard drive. OS loading? Done Boot from CD? Go to âFlowchar t 2.13âNo OS Loading, Diskette Driv e. â Boot from hard drive? Boot from diskette? Change boot priority through the Setup Utility and reboot. Boot from hard drive? Y Y Y Y Y N N N N N Check the Setup utility for correct booting order .
T r oubleshooting Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 2â17 Flowc h ar t 2. 1 1âN o OS L oa di ng , H ard Drive, Pa r t 2 Load OS using Operating System disc (if applicable). Continued from âFlowchar t 2.10âNo OS Loading, Hard Drive, P ar t 1. â Reseat hard drive. Done CD or diskette in drive? 1. Replace hard drive. 2. Replace system board. Go to âFlowchar t 2.13âNo OS Loading, Diskette Driv e. â Format hard drive and bring to ab o o t a b l e C:\ prompt. Create partition, and then format hard drive to bootable C:\ prompt. Boot from diskette drive? Remove diskette and reboot. Y N Boot from hard drive? Y N Y N Hard drive accessible? Y N Hard drive accessible? Done Run FDISK. Y N Hard drive partitioned? Hard drive formatted? Y N Y N Computer booted? Done Y N Go to âFlowchart 2.12âNo OS Loading, Hard Drive, P ar t 3. â Go to âFlowchar t 2.12âNo OS Loading, Hard Drive , P ar t 3. â
2â18 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de T r oublesh ooting Flo wc h art 2. 1 2âNo OS Loadin g, H ard Driv e, Pa r t 3 Y System files on hard drive? Continued from âFlowchar t 2.11âNo OS Loading, Hard Drive, P ar t 2. â Clean virus. Done N Install OS and reboot. Virus on hard drive? OS loading from hard drive? Y N Y N Y N Diagnostics on diskette? Replace hard drive. Run diagnostics and follow recommendations. Run SCANDISK and check for bad sectors. Can bad sectors be fixed? Replace hard drive. Y N Y N Fix ba d sectors. Boot from hard drive? Replace hard drive. Done
T r oubleshooting Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 2â19 Flo wc h art 2. 1 3âNo OS Loadin g , Disk et te Driv e Done Y N Reseat diskette drive. OS not loading from diskette drive. Done Y Y Y Y Y Y Y N N N N N N N OS loading? Nonsystem disk message? Bootable diskette in drive? Install bootable diskette and reboot computer . Check diskette for system files. Tr y d i f f e r e n t diskette. 1. Replace diskette drive. 2. Replace system board. Nonsystem disk error? OS loading? Boot from another device? Enable drive and cold boot computer . Is diskette drive boot order correct? Change boot priority using the Setup Utility . Go to âFlowchar t 2.17âNonfunc- tioning De vice. â Diskette drive enabled in the Setup Utility? Go to âFlowchart 2.17âNonfunctioning De vice. â Reset the computer . Refer to Section 1.2, âResetting the Computer , â for instructions.
2â20 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de T r oublesh ooting Flo wc h art 2. 1 4âNo OS Load ing , Opti cal Driv e Y Done N Bootable disc in drive? Disc in drive? No OS loading from CD-ROM or DVD-ROM drive. Install bootable disc and reboot computer . Go to âFlowchar t 2.17âNonfunctioning De vice. â Go to âFlowchar t 2.17âNonfunctioning De vice. â Install bootable disc. Boots from CD or DVD? Boots from CD or DVD? T r y another bootable disc. Booting from another device? Booting order correct? Correct boot order using the Setup Utility . Done Reseat drive. Y Y Y Y Y N N N N N Reset the computer . Refer to Section 1.2, âResetting the Computer , â for instructions.
T r oubleshooting Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 2â21 Flo wc h art 2. 1 5âNo Au dio, P ar t 1 No audio. N Computer in docking device (if applicable)? Internal audio? Audio? Done Undock Audio? Done T urn up audio internally or externally . Go to âFlowchar t 2.16âNo A udio , Pa r t 2 . â Go to âFlowchar t 2.17âNonfunctioning De vice. â Y Y Y Y N N N Go to âFlowchar t 2.16âNo A udio , Pa r t 2 . â Replace the docking device.
2â2 2 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de T r oublesh ooting Flo wc h art 2. 1 6âNo Audio, P ar t 2 YN Continued from âFlowchart 2.15âNo A udio , Pa r t 1 . â Reload audio drivers. Audio driver in OS configured? Audio? Y Y Y N N N Correct drivers for application? Connect to external speaker . Load drivers and set configuration in OS. Audio? Done Replace audio board and speaker connections in computer (if applicable). 1. Replace internal speakers. 2. Replace audio board (if applicable). 3. Replace system board.
T r oubleshooting Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 2â2 3 Flo wc h art 2. 1 7âNonfun c tioning De vice Done Any physical device detected? Y N Unplug the nonfunctioning device from the computer and inspect cables and plugs for bent or broken pins or other damage. Reseat device. Clear CMOS. Done Fix o r replace broken item. Nonfunctioning device. Reattach device. Close computer , plug in power , and reboot. Device boots properly? Go to âFlowchart 2.9âNo Operating System (OS) Loading. â Device boots properly? Replace hard drive. Replace diskette drive. Replace NIC. If integrated NIC, replace system board. Y N Y N
2â2 4 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de T r oublesh ooting Flo wc h art 2. 1 8âNonfunc tionin g K e yboar d Y N OK? Keyboard not operating properly . External device works? Replace system board. Replace system board. Connect computer to good external keyboard. Reseat internal keyboard connector (if applicable). Replace internal keyboard or cable. OK? Y N Y N Done Done
T r oubleshooting Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 2â2 5 Flo wc h art 2. 1 9âN onfunc tioning P oin ting De vic e Y N OK? Pointing device not operating properly . External device works? Replace system board. Replace system board. Connect computer to good external pointing device. Reseat internal pointing device connector (if applicable). Replace internal pointing device or cable. OK? Y N Y N Done Done
2â2 6 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de T r oublesh ooting Flo wc har t 2.20âNo N et w ork/Modem Con nectio n Y Disconnect all power from the computer and open. No network or modem connection. N Done Digital line? Network or modem jack active? Replace jack or have jack activated. Connect to nondigital line. NIC/modem configured in OS? Reload drivers and reconfigure. Reseat NIC/modem (if applicable). Replace the NIC/modem (if applicable). Replace system board. OK? OK? Done N N N N Y Y Y Y
Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 3â1 3 I llus trated P ar ts C a talog This chapter provides an illustrated parts breakdo wn and a reference for spare part numbers. 3. 1 S erial N umber Location When ordering parts or requesting information, provide the computer serial number and model number located on the bottom of the computer . Ser ial Number L ocation
3â2 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Illustr ated P ar ts Cat alog 3.2 Comp uter M ajor Com ponen ts Com pu te r M ajor Components
Illustr ated P arts Catalog Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 3â3 Ta b l e 3 - 1 Spare P ar ts: Computer Major Components Item Description Spare P art Number 1 Display assemb lies (include wireless antenna transceiv ers and cab les) 15.4-inch, WUXGA 15.4-inch, WSXGA 15.4-inch, WXGA 416413-001 416412-001 416411-001 2 Switch co vers (include LED board and LED board cab le) F or use with nw8440 and nc8430 models F or use with nx8420 models 416405-001 416406-001 3 Ke yboar ds K eyboard with pointing stic k (inc ludes ke yboard and pointing stick cab les) for use in: Belgium Brazil The Czech Repub lic Denmark Fr a n c e F rench Canada Ger many Greece Hungar y Iceland Inter nationally Israel Italy Ja pa n Ko r e a Latin America 416416-A41 416416-201 416416-221 416416-081 416416-051 416416-121 416416-041 416416-151 416416-211 416416-DD1 416416-B31 416416-BB1 416416-061 416416-291 416416-AD1 416416-161 Norwa y P or tugal Russia Saudi Arabia Slov akia Slov enia Spain Sweden Switzerland Ta i w a n Thailand Tu r k e y The United Kingdom The United States 416416-091 416416-131 416416-251 416416-171 416416-231 416416-BA1 416416-071 416416-101 416416-111 416416-AB1 416416-281 416416-141 416416-031 416416-001
3â4 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Illustr ated P ar ts Cat alog Com pu te r M ajor Components
Illustr ated P arts Catalog Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 3â5 Ta b l e 3 - 1 Spare P ar ts: Computer Major Components (Continued) Item Description Spare P art Number 3 Ke yboar ds (Continued) K eyboard without pointing stic k (inc ludes ke yboard cable) f or use in: Belgium Brazil The Czech Repub lic Denmark Fr a n c e F rench Canada Ger many Greece Hungar y Iceland Inter nationally Israel Italy Ja pa n Ko r e a Latin America 416417-A41 416417-201 416417-221 416417-081 416417-051 416417-121 416417-041 416417-151 416417-211 416417-DD1 416417-B31 416417-BB1 416417-061 416417-291 416417-AD1 416417-161 Norwa y P or tugal Russia Saudi Arabia Slov akia Slov enia Spain Sweden Switzerland Ta i w a n Thailand Tu r k e y The United Kingdom The United States 416417-091 416417-131 416417-251 416417-171 416417-231 416417-BA1 416417-071 416417-101 416417-111 416417-AB1 416417-281 416417-141 416417-031 416417-001 4 T ouchP ads With 3 T ouchP ad buttons With 2 T ouchP ad buttons 382675-001 382676-001
3â6 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Illustr ated P ar ts Cat alog Com pu te r M ajor Components
Illustr ated P arts Catalog Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 3â7 Ta b l e 3 - 1 Spare P ar ts: Computer Major Components (Continued) Item Description Spare P art Number 5 T op cover s (include speak ers) F or use with nw8440 models with finger print reader F or use with nw8440 models without finger print reader F or use with nc8430 and nx820 models with finger print reader F or use with nc8430 and nx8420 models without finger print reader 418807-001 416401-001 416403-001 416042-001 Fingerprint reader board with cab le (not illustrated) 416400-001 Plastics Kit 416420-001 6a 6b 6c 6d Includes: PC Card slot space sav er Bluetooth module cov er Memor y module cov er (includes 3 captive scre ws) Hard drive co ver (includes 2 captiv e screws) Not illustrated: computer f eet (7) 7 Fa n assembly 416409-001 8 Heat sink (includes ther mal paste) 416408-001 9 Thermal plate 416410-001 10 Processor s (include ther mal paste) Intel Core Duo T2600 (2.16-GHz) processor Intel Core Duo T2500 (2.00-GHz) processor Intel Core Duo T2400 (1.83-GHz) processor Intel Core Duo T2300 (1.67-GHz) processor 413686-001 413685-001 413684-001 413683-001
3â8 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Illustr ated P ar ts Cat alog Com pu te r M ajor Components
Illustr ated P arts Catalog Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 3â9 Ta b l e 3 - 1 Spare P ar ts: Computer Major Components (Continued) Item Description Spare P art Number 11 Mini Car d modules 802.11b/g HS WLAN module f or use in Nor th Amer ica 407253-001 802.11b/g HS WLAN module f or use in the countries listed below . These countr ies are categor ized as the rest of the world (RO W). 407253-002 China Ecuador Haiti Honduras P akistan Pe r u Qatar South K orea Uruguay V enezuela 802.11b/g HS WLAN module f or use in J apan 407253-291 802.11b/g LJ WLAN module f or use in Nor th America 407254-001 802.11b/g LJ WLAN modu le f or use in the R O W countries listed below . 407254-002 China Ecuador Haiti Honduras P akistan Pe r u Qatar South K orea Uruguay V enezuela 802.11b/g LJ WLAN module f or use in J apan 407254-291 802.11a/b/g GL WLAN module f or use in the countries listed below . These countrie s are categor ized as most of the world (MO W 1). 407575-001 Antigua & Barb uda Argentina A ustralia Bahamas Barbados Brunei Canada Chile Dominican Repub lic Guam Guatemala Hong K ong Pa n a m a India Indonesia Mala ysia Me xico New Zealand Pa r a g u a y Saudi Arabia Ta i w a n The United States Vietnam
3â10 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Illustr ated P ar ts Cat alog Com pu te r M ajor Components
Illustr ated P arts Catalog Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 3â11 Ta b l e 3 - 1 Spare P ar ts: Computer Major Components (Continued) Item Description Spare P art Number 11 Mini Car d modules (Continued) 802.11a/b/g GL WLAN module f or use in the countries listed below . These countrie s are categor ized as most of the world (MO W 2). 407575-002 Aruba A ustria Azerbaijan Bahrain Belgium Ber muda Bulgaria Ca yman Islands Columbia Croatia Cyprus Czech Repub lic Denmark Eg ypt El Salv ador Estonia Finland Fr a n c e Georgia Ger many Greece Hungar y Iceland Ireland Italy Latvia Lebanon The Philippines Po l a n d P or tugal Romania Russia Serbia and Montenegro Singapore Slov akia Liechtenstein Lithuania Lux embourg Malta Monaco The Netherlands Norwa y Oman Slov enia South Africa Spain Sri Lanka Sweden Switzerland Tu r k e y The United Kingdom Uzbekistan 802.11a/b/g GL WLAN module f or use in the R O W countries listed below . 407575-003 China Ecuador Haiti Honduras P akistan Pe r u Qatar South K orea Uruguay V enezuela 802.11a/b/g GL WLAN module f or use in Japan 407575-291
3â12 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Illustr ated P ar ts Cat alog Com pu te r M ajor Components
Illustr ated P arts Catalog Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 3â13 Ta b l e 3 - 1 Spare P ar ts: Computer Major Components (Continued) Item Description Spare P art Number 12 System board (includes R TC batter y and 256-MB of video memor y) 416397-001 13 Memory modules , 1-DIMM PC2-5300 2048-MB 1024-MB 512-MB 256-MB 417506-001 414046-001 414045-001 414044-001 PC2-4200 2048-MB 1024-MB 512-MB 256-MB 417505-001 414042-001 414041-001 414040-001 14 Modem module 413691-001 15 System board frame 416407-001 16 Serial connector module and cable 416399-001 17 Optical drives 8X Max D VD±RW and CD-R W Double-La yer Combo Drive 4X Max D VD±RW and CD-R W Double-La yer Combo Drive 24X Max D VD/CD-R W Combo Drive 8X Max D VD-ROM drive 413702-001 413700-001 413701-001 413699-001 18 USB/audio board (includes USB board cab le and audio board cable) 416398-001 19 Base enclosure 416404-001 20 Bluetooth® module (includes Bluetooth module cable) 398393-001
3â14 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Illustr ated P ar ts Cat alog Com pu te r M ajor Components
Illustr ated P arts Catalog Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 3â15 Ta b l e 3 - 1 Spare P ar ts: Computer Major Components (Continued) Item Description Spare P art Number 21 8-cell, 4.8-AH battery pack 372771-001 22 Hard drives 7200 r pm 100-GB 80-GB 416415-001 417507-001 5400 r pm 120-GB 100-GB 80-GB 60-GB 416414-001 413853-001 413852-001 413851-001
3â16 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Illustr ated P ar ts Cat alog 3. 3 Plas tic s Kit
Illustr ated P arts Catalog Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 3â17 T able 3-2 Plastics Kit Spare P ar t Number Information Item Description Spare P art Number Plastics Kit Includes: 417527-001 1 Memory module compar tment cov e r (includes 1 captive scre w , captured by C clip) 2 Bluetooth module co v er (includes 1 captiv e screw , captured by C clip) 3 Computer f eet (8) 4 PC Card slot bez el 5 Hard driv e cov er (includes 2 capt ive scre ws, captured b y C clips)
3â18 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Illustr ated P ar ts Cat alog 3.4 M a s s St ora g e D e vi ces
Illustr ated P arts Catalog Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 3â19 Ta b l e 3 - 3 Mass Storage Devices Spare P ar t Number Information Item Description Spare P art Number 1 Hard drives (include fr ame and connector) 7200 r pm 100-GB 80-GB 416415-001 417507-001 5400 r pm 120-GB 100-GB 80-GB 60-GB 416414-001 413853-001 413852-001 413851-001 2 Optical drives (include bezel) 8X Max D VD±RW and CD-R W Double-La yer Combo Drive 4X Max D VD±RW and CD-R W Double-La yer Combo Drive 24X Max D VD/CD-R W Combo Drive 8X Max D VD-ROM drive 413702-001 413700-001 413701-001 413699-001
3â20 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Illustr ated P ar ts Cat alog 3.5 Miscell aneous (N ot I llustra ted) Ta b l e 3 - 4 Miscellaneous (Not Illustrated) Spare P ar t Information Description Spare P art Number 90-watt A C adapter 416421-021 External MultiBa y II 366143-001 External MultiBa y II power cable and stand 366144-001 HP Extended Life Battery 367456-001 HP Doc king Station 413267-001 HP Doc king Station Miscellaneous Plastics Kit 380089-001 Devices f or use in External MultiBa y II and HP Docking Station 2X Max D VD±RW and CD-R W Double-La y er Combo Dr iv e 375557-001 5400-r pm, 80-GB hard drive 375198-001 MultiBa y 8X D VD-ROM Drive 373314-001 MultiBa y 24X D VD/CD-RW Combo Driv e 373315-001 USB diskette drive 359118-001 Nylon carrying case 325815-002
Illustr ated P arts Catalog Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 3â21 P ower cords: F or use in the United States 246959-001 F or use in A ustralia 246959-011 F or use in Europe, the Middle East, and Afri ca 246959-021 F or use in the United Kingdom 246959-031 F or use in Italy 246959-061 F or use in Denmark 246959-081 F or use in Brazil 246959-201 F or use in Japan 246959-291 F or use in K orea 246959-AD1 F or use in Switzerland 246959-A G1 F or use in Israel 246959-BB1 Screw Kit (includes the f ollowing screw s; ref er to Appendix A, âScrew Listing, â f or more inf orm ation on specifications and usage) 416419-001 â Phillips PM3.0Ã3.0 screw â Phillips PM2.5Ã13.0 spring-loaded scre w â Phillips PM2.5Ã7.0 screw â Phillips PM2.5Ã5.0 screw â Phillips PM2.5Ã4.0 screw â Phillips PM2.5Ã3.0 screw â Phillips PM2.0Ã8.0 screw â Phillips PM2.0Ã5.0 screw â Phillips PM2.0Ã4.0 screw â Phillips PM2.0Ã3.0 screw â Phillips PM2.0Ã2.0 screw â Phillips PM1.5Ã3.0 screw â T orx8 TM2.5Ã10.0 scre w â T orx8 T8M2.5Ã6.0 scre w â T orx8 T8M2.5Ã4.0 scre w â He x HM5.0Ã12.0 screw loc k â Rubber scre w cov ers Ta b l e 3 - 4 Miscellaneous (Not Illustrated) Spare P ar t Information (Continued) Description Spare P art Number
3â2 2 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Illustr ated P ar ts Cat alog 3.6 Sequ enti al P ar t Number Lis ting Ta b l e 3 - 5 Sequential P ar t Number Listing Spare P art Number Description 246959-001 P ower cord f or use in the United States 246959-011 P ower cord f or use in Au stralia 246959-021 P ower cord f or use in Eu rope, the Middle East, and Africa 246959-031 P ower cord f or use in the United Kingdom 246959-061 P ower cord f or use in Italy 246959-081 P ower cord f or use in Denmar k 246959-201 P ower cord f or use in Brazil 246959-291 P ower cord f or use in Japan 246959-AD1 P ower cord f or use in K orea 246959-A G1 P ower cord f or use in Switzerland 246959-BB1 P ower cord f or use in Israel 325815-002 Nylon carr ying case 359118-001 USB diskette driv e 366143-001 Exter nal MultiBa y II 366144-001 Exter nal MultiBa y II pow er cab le and stand 367456-001 HP Extended Lif e Batter y 372771-001 8-cell, 4.8-AH batter y pack 373314-001 MultiBa y 8X D VD-ROM Driv e f or use in Exter nal MultiBa y II and HP Docking Station 373315-001 MultiBa y 24X D VD/CD-RW Combo Drive f or use in Exter nal MultiBa y II and HP Doc king Station
Illustr ated P arts Catalog Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 3â2 3 375198-001 5400-r pm, 80-GB hard drive f o r use in Exter nal MultiBay II and HP Dock ing Station 375557-001 2X Max D VD±RW and CD-R W Double-La yer Combo Drive f or use in Exter nal MultiBa y II and HP Doc king Station 380089-001 HP Docking Station Miscellaneous Plastics Kit 382675-001 T ouchP ad with 3 T ouchP ad buttons 382676-001 T ouchP ad with 2 T ouchP ad buttons 398393-001 Bluetooth module (i ncludes Bluetooth module cable) 407253-001 802.11b/g HS WLAN mo dule fo r use in Nor th Amer ica 407253-002 802.11b/g HS WLAN Mini Card module f or use in the RO W countries listed below: China Ecuador Haiti Honduras Pa k i s t a n Pe r u Qatar South K orea Uruguay V enezuela 407253-291 802.11b/g HS WLAN module f or use in Japan 407254-001 802.11b/g LJ WLAN m odule f or use in Nor th Amer ica 407254-002 802.11b/g LJ WLAN modu le f or use in the R O W countries listed below: China Ecuador Haiti Honduras Pa k i s t a n Pe r u Qatar South K orea Uruguay V enezuela 407254-291 802.11b/g LJ WLAN module f or use in J apan Ta b l e 3 - 5 Sequential P art Number Listing (Continued) Spare P art Number Description
3â2 4 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Illustr ated P ar ts Cat alog 407575-001 802.11a/b/g GL WLAN modu le f or use in the MO W1 countries listed below: Antigua & Barb uda Argentina A ustralia Bahamas Barbados Brunei Canada Chile Dominican Repub lic Guam Guatemala Hong K ong Pa n a m a India Indonesia Mala ysia Me xico Ne w Zealand Pa r a g u a y Saudi Arabia Ta i w a n The United States Vietnam 407575-002 802.11a/b/g GL WLAN modu le f or use in the MO W2 countries listed below: Aruba A ustria Azerbaijan Bahrain Belgium Ber muda Bulgaria Ca yman Islands Columbia Croatia Cyprus Czech Repub lic Denmark Eg ypt El Salv ador Estonia Finland Fr a n c e Georgia Ger man y Greece Hungar y Iceland Ireland Italy Latvia Lebanon The Philippines Po l a n d P or tugal Romania Russia Serbia and Montenegro Singapore Slov akia Liechtenstein Lithuania Lux embourg Malta Monaco The Netherlands Norwa y Oman Slov enia South Africa Spain Sri Lanka Sweden Switzerland Tu r k e y The United Kingdom Uzbekistan Ta b l e 3 - 5 Sequential P art Number Listing (Continued) Spare P art Number Description
Illustr ated P arts Catalog Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 3â2 5 407575-003 802.11a/b/g GL WLAN modu le f or use in the R O W countries listed below: China Ecuador Haiti Honduras Pa k i s t a n Pe r u Qatar South K orea Uruguay V enezuela 407575-291 802.11a/b/g GL WLAN module for use in J a pan 413267-001 HP Docking Station 413683-001 Intel Core Duo T2300 (1.67-GHz) processor (includes ther mal paste) 413684-001 Intel Core Duo T2400 (1.83-GHz) processor (includes ther mal paste) 413685-001 Intel Core Duo T2500 (2.00-GHz) processor (includes ther mal paste) 413686-001 Intel Core DuoT2600 (2.17-GHz) processor (includes ther mal paste) 413691-001 Modem module 413699-001 8X Max D VD-ROM drive 413700-001 4X Max D VD±RW and CD-R W Double-La yer Combo Drive 413701-001 24X Max D VD/CD-RW Combo Driv e 413702-001 8X Max D VD±RW and CD-R W Double-La yer Combo Drive 413851-001 5400-r pm, 60-GB hard drive 413852-001 5400-r pm, 80-GB hard drive 413853-001 5400-r pm, 100-GB hard drive 414040-001 1-DIMM, PC2-4200 256 MB memor y module 414041-001 1-DIMM, PC2-4200, 512 MB memor y module Ta b l e 3 - 5 Sequential P art Number Listing (Continued) Spare P art Number Description
3â2 6 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Illustr ated P ar ts Cat alog 414042-001 1-DIMM, PC2-4200 , 1024 MB memor y module 414044-001 1-DIMM, PC2-5300, 256 MB memor y module 414045-001 1-DIMM, PC2-5300, 512 MB memor y module 414046-001 1-DIMM, PC2-5300 , 1024 MB memor y module 416042-001 T op cov er for use with nc8430 and nx8420 models with finger print reader (includes speakers) 416397-001 System board (include s R TC batter y and 256 MB of video memor y) 416398-001 USB/audio board (include s USB board cabl e and audio board cable) 416399-001 Serial connector module and cable 416400-001 Finger print reader board and cable 416401-001 T op cov er for use with nw8440 models with fingerpr int reader (includes speakers) 416402-001 T op cov er for use with nc8430 and nx8420 models without finger print reader (includes speakers) 416404-001 Base enclosure 416405-001 Switch cov er for use wi th nw8440 and nc8430 models (includes LED board and LED board cab le) 416406-001 Switch cov er for use with nx8420 models (includes LED board and LED board cable) 416407-001 System board frame 416408-001 Heat sink (i ncludes ther mal paste) 416409-001 F an assembly 416410-001 Ther mal plate Ta b l e 3 - 5 Sequential P art Number Listing (Continued) Spare P art Number Description
Illustr ated P arts Catalog Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 3â2 7 416411-001 15.4-inch, WXGA displa y assembly (includes wireless antenna transceiv ers and cab les) 416412-001 15.4-inch, WSXGA disp la y assembly (includes wireless antenna transceiv ers and cab les) 416413-001 15.4-inch, WUXGA disp lay assemb ly (includes wireless antenna transceiv ers and cab les) 416414-001 5400-r pm, 120-GB hard drive 416415-001 7200-r pm, 100-GB hard drive 416416-001 K eyboard with pointing st ick f or use in the United States 416416-031 K eyboard with pointing st ick f or use in the United Kingdom 416416-041 K eyboard with pointi ng stic k f or use in Ger many 416416-051 K eyboard with pointi ng stic k f or use in F rance 416416-061 K eyboard with poin ting stic k f or use in Italy 416416-071 K eyboard with pointi ng stic k f or use in Spain 416416-081 K eyboard with pointi ng stic k f or use in Denmark 416416-091 K eyboard with pointi ng stic k f or use in Norwa y 416416-101 K eyboard with pointi ng stic k f or use in Sweden 416416-111 K eyboard with pointing stic k f or use in Switzerland 416416-121 K eyboard with pointing stick f or use in F rench Canada 416416-131 K eyboard with pointi ng stic k f or use in P or tugal 416416-141 K eyboard with pointi ng stic k f or use in T urke y 416416-151 K eyboard with pointi ng stic k f or use in Greece 416416-161 K eyboard with pointing stick f or use in Latin Amer ica 416416-171 K eyboard with pointing stic k f or use in Saudi Arabia Ta b l e 3 - 5 Sequential P art Number Listing (Continued) Spare P art Number Description
3â2 8 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Illustr ated P ar ts Cat alog 416416-201 K eyboard with pointi ng stic k f or use in Brazil 416416-211 K eyboard with pointi ng stic k f or use in Hungar y 416416-221 K eyboard with pointing st ick f or use in the Czech Repub lic 416416-231 K eyboard with pointi ng stic k f or use in Slov akia 416416-251 K eyboard with pointi ng stic k f or use in Russia 416416-281 K eyboard with pointi ng stic k f or use in Thailand 416416-291 K eyboard with pointi ng stic k f or use in J apan 416416-AB1 K eyboard with pointi ng stic k f or use in T aiw an 416416-AD1 K eyboard with pointi ng stic k f or use in K orea 416416-B31 K eyboard with pointing stic k for use internationally 416416-BA1 K eyboard with pointi ng stic k f or use in Slov enia 416416-BB1 K eyboard with pointi ng stic k f or use in Israel 416416-DD1 K eyboard with pointi ng stic k f or use in Iceland 416417-001 K eyboard without pointing stic k f or use in the United States 416417-031 K eyboard without pointing stic k f or use in the United Kingdom 416417-041 K eyboard without pointing stic k f or use in Ger many 416417-051 K eyboard without pointing stic k f or use in F rance 416417-061 K eyboard without poin ting stick f or use in Italy 416417-071 K eyboard without pointing stic k f or use in Spain 416417-081 K eyboard without pointi ng stic k f or use in Denmark 416417-091 K eyboard without pointing stic k f or use in Norwa y 416417-101 K eyboard without pointing stic k f or use in Sweden Ta b l e 3 - 5 Sequential P art Number Listing (Continued) Spare P art Number Description
Illustr ated P arts Catalog Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 3â29 416417-111 K eyboard without pointing stic k f or use in Switzerland 416417-121 K eyboard without pointing stic k f or use in F rench Canada 416417-131 K eyboard without pointing stic k f or use in P or tugal 416417-141 K eyboard without pointing stic k f or use in T urke y 416417-151 K eyboard without poin ting stick f or use in Greece 416417-161 K eyboard without pointing stic k f or use in Latin America 416417-171 K eyboard without pointing stic k f or use in Saudi Arabia 416417-201 K eyboard without pointing stic k f or use in Brazil 416417-211 K eyboard without pointing stic k f or use in Hungar y 416417-221 K eyboard without pointing stic k f or use in the Czech Repub lic 416417-231 K eyboard without pointing stic k f or use in Slov akia 416417-251 K eyboard without pointing stic k f or use in Russia 416417-281 K eyboard without pointi ng stic k fo r use in Thailand 416417-291 K eyboard without pointing stic k f or use in Japan 416417-AB1 K eyboard without pointing stic k f or use in T aiwan 416417-AD1 K eyboard without pointing stic k f or use in K orea 416417-B31 K eyboard without pointi ng stic k for use internationally 416417-BA1 K eyboard without pointing stic k f or use in Slov enia 416417-BB1 K eyboard without pointing stic k f or use in Israel 416417-DD1 K eyboard without pointi ng stic k f or use in Iceland 416419-001 Screw Kit 416420-001 Plastics Kit Ta b l e 3 - 5 Sequential P art Number Listing (Continued) Spare P art Number Description
3â30 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Illustr ated P ar ts Cat alog 416421-001 90-watt A C adapter 417505-001 1-DIMM, PC2-4200 , 2048 MB memor y module 417506-001 1-DIMM, PC2-5300 , 2048 MB memor y module 417507-001 7200-r pm, 80-GB hard drive 418807-001 T op cov er for use with nw8440 models without fingerpr int reader (includes speakers) Ta b l e 3 - 5 Sequential P art Number Listing (Continued) Spare P art Number Description
Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 4â1 4 Remo v al an d Repl acem ent Preliminaries This chapter provides essential information for proper and safe remov al and replacement service. 4. 1 T ools Required Y ou will need the follo wing tools to complete the remov al and replacement procedures: â Magnetic scre wdri ver â Phillips P0 and P1 scre wdri vers â T orx8 screwdri ver â Flat-bladed scre wdri v er â Hex 5.0-mm sock et dri ve for system board scre w locks
4â2 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Re mo val and R e placemen t Pr eliminar ies 4.2 Ser vice C onsidera tions The follo wing sections include some of the considerations that you should keep in mind during disassembly and assembly procedures. â As you remov e each subassembly from the computer , place the subassembly (and all accompanying scre ws) away from the work area to pre vent damage. Pl a s t i c P a r t s Using excessi ve force during disassembly and reassembly can damage plastic parts. Use care when handling the plastic parts. Apply pressure only at the points designated in the maintenance instructions. C abl es and Conn ec tors à CA UTION: When se rvi c ing the compute r , be sure that cables ar e placed in their pr oper locations dur ing the reas sembl y pr ocess . Impr oper cable placement can damage the compu ter . Cables must be handled with extreme care to a void damage. Apply only the tension required to unseat or seat the cables during remov al and insertion. Handle cables by the connector whene ver possible. In all cases, a void bending, twisting, or tearing cables. Be sure the cables are routed in such a way that they cannot be caught or snagged b y parts being remo ved or replaced. Handle flex cables w ith e xtreme care; these cables tear easily .
R emo val and R eplacement Pr eliminar ie s Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 4â3 4. 3 Pr e v ent ing Da mage t o R emo v able D ri v es Remov able dri ves are fragile components that must be handled with care. T o pre vent damage to the computer , damage to a remov able dri ve, or loss of information, observ e the follo wing precautions: â Before removing or inserting a hard dri ve, shut do wn the computer . If you are unsure whether the computer is off or in hibernation, turn the computer on, and then shut it do wn through the operating system. â Before removing a disk ette dri v e or optical dri ve, be sure that a diskette or disc is not in the dri ve and be sure that the optical dri ve tray is closed. â Before handling a dri ve, be sure that you are dischar ged of static electricity . While handling a dri ve, a void touching the connector . â Handle dri ves on surf aces co vered with at least one inch of shock-proof foam. â A v oid dropping dri v es from any height onto an y surface. â After removing a hard dri ve, an optical dri ve, or a diskette dri ve, place it in a static-proof bag. â A v oid exposing a hard dri ve to products that ha v e magnetic f ields, such as monitors or speakers. â A v oid exposing a dri ve to temperature e xtremes or liquids. â If a dri ve must be mailed, place the dri ve in a b ubble pack mailer or other suitable form of protecti ve packaging and label the package âFRA GILE: Handle W ith Care. â
4â4 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Re mo val and R e placemen t Pr eliminar ies 4.4 Pr e v entin g Elec trosta tic Dam ag e Many electronic components are sensiti ve to electrostatic dischar ge (ESD). Circuitry design and structure determine the degree of sensiti vity . Networks b uilt into man y integrated circuits provide some protection, b ut in many cases, the dischar ge contains enough po wer to alter de vice parameters or melt silicon junctions. A sudden dischar ge of static electricity from a finger or other conductor can destroy static-sensiti ve de vices or microcircuitry . Often the spark is neither felt nor heard, b ut damage occurs. An electronic de vice e xposed to electrostatic discharge might not be af fected at all and can work perfectly throughout a normal cycle. Or the de vice might function normally for a while, then degrade in the internal layers, reducing its life e xpectancy .
R emo val and R eplacement Pr eliminar ie s Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 4â5 4.5 P ac k a ging an d T rans por ting Precautions Use the follo wing grounding precautions when packaging and transporting equipment: â T o av oid hand contact, transport products in static-safe containers, such as tubes, bags, or boxes. â Protect all electrostatic-sensiti ve parts and assemblies with conducti ve or appro ved containers or packaging. â K eep electrostatic-sensiti v e parts in their containers until the parts arri ve at static-free w orkstations. â Place items on a grounded surface before remo ving items from their containers. â Alw ays be properly grounded when touching a sensiti ve component or assembly . â Store reusable electrostatic-sensiti ve parts from assemblies in protecti ve packaging or nonconducti ve foam. â Use transporters and con ve yors made of antistatic belts and roller b ushings. Be sure that mechanized equipment used for moving materials is wired to ground and that proper materials are selected to a v oid static charging. When grounding is not possible, use an ionizer to dissipate electric charges.
4â6 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Re mo val and R e placemen t Pr eliminar ies 4.6 W orkstation Precau tions Use the follo wing grounding precautions at workstations: â Cov er the workstation with approv ed static-shielding material (refer to T a ble 4-2, âStatic-Shielding Materialsâ ). â Use a wrist strap connected to a properly grounded work surface and use properly grounded tools and equipment. â Use conducti ve f ield service tools, such as cutters, scre wdri vers, and v acuums. â When f ixtures must directly contact dissipati ve surf aces, use f ixtures made only of static-safe materials. â K eep the work area free of nonconducti ve materials, such as ordinary plastic assembly aids and Styrofoam. â Handle electrostatic-sensiti ve components, parts, and assemblies by the case or PCM laminate. Handle these items only at static-free workstations. â A v oid contact with pins, leads, or circuitry . â T urn of f po wer and input signals before inserting or removing connectors or test equipment.
R emo val and R eplacement Pr eliminar ie s Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 4â7 4.7 Groundin g Eq uip ment an d Methods Grounding equipment must include either a wrist strap or a foot strap at a grounded workstation. â When seated, wear a wrist strap connected to a grounded system. Wrist straps are flexible straps with a minimum of one megohm ±10% resistance in the ground cords. T o provide proper ground, wear a strap snugly against the skin at all times. On grounded mats with banana-plug connectors, use alligator clips to connect a wrist strap. â When standing, use foot straps and a grounded floor mat. Foot straps (heel, toe, or boot straps) can be used at standing workstations and are compatible with most types of shoes or boots. On conducti ve floors or dissipati ve floor mats, use foot straps on both feet with a minimum of one megohm resistance between the operator and ground. T o be effecti ve, the conducti ve strips must be w o rn in contact with the skin. Other grounding equipment recommended for use in pre v enting electrostatic damage includes â Antistatic tape. â Antistatic smocks, aprons, and slee ve protectors. â Conducti ve bins and other assembly or soldering aids. â Nonconducti ve foam. â Conducti ve tabletop w orkstations with ground cords of one megohm resistance. â Static-dissipati ve tables or floor mats with hard ties to the ground. â Field service kits. â Static aw areness labels. â Material-handling packages. â Nonconducti ve plastic bags, tubes, or box es. â Metal tote boxes. â Electrostatic v oltage le vels and protecti ve materials.
4â8 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Re mo val and R e placemen t Pr eliminar ies T able 4-1 shows ho w humidity affects the electrostatic v oltage le ve ls generated by dif ferent activities. T able 4-2 lists the shielding protection provided by antistatic bags and floor mats. Ta b l e 4 - 1 T ypical Electrostatic V olta ge Levels Relative Humidity Event 10% 40% 55% W alking across car pet 35,000 V 15,000 V 7,500 V W alking across vinyl floor 12,000 V 5,000 V 3,000 V Motions of bench worker 6,000 V 800 V 400 V Removing DIPS from plastic tube 2,000 V 700 V 400 V Removing DIPS from vin yl tra y 11,500 V 4,000 V 2,000 V Removing DIPS from Styrof oam 14,500 V 5,000 V 3,500 V Removing b ubb le pack from PCB 26,500 V 20,000 V 7,000 V P acking PCBs in f oam-lined bo x 21,000 V 11,000 V 5,000 V â A product can be degraded by as little as 700 V. Ta b l e 4 - 2 Static-Shielding Materials Material Use V oltage Pr otection Level Antistatic plastic Bags 1,500 V Carbon-loaded plastic F loor mats 7,500 V Metallized laminate Floor mats 5,000 V
Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 5â1 5 Remo v al an d Repl acem ent Pr ocedure s This chapter provides remo val and replacement procedures. There are as many as 72 scre ws and screw locks, in 14 dif ferent sizes and types, that may ha ve to be remo ve d, replaced, or loosened when servicing the computer . Make special note of each scre w and scre w lock size and location during remo v al and replacement. Refer to Appendix A, âScrew Listing, â for detailed information on scre w and scre w lock sizes, locations, and usage.
5â2 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Re mo val and R e placemen t Pr ocedur es 5 . 1 Seri al Number Report the computer serial number to HP when requesting information or ordering spare parts. The serial number is located on the bottom of the computer . Ser ial Number L ocation
R emo v al and Replace ment Pr ocedure s Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 5â3 5 .2 Disassem bl y Seque nce C hart Use the chart belo w to determine the section number to be referenced when removing computer components. Disassembl y Sequence Char t Section Description # of Screws Remo ved 5.3 Preparing the Computer for Disassemb ly Batter y 0 0 5.4 Hard Drive 2 loosened to remov e the hard drive co ver 1 loosened to remov e the hard drive 4 to disassemble hard driv e 5.5 Computer F eet 0 5.6 Optical Drive 1 to remov e the optical dr ive 2 to remov e the optical dr ive brac k et 5.7 External Memor y Module 1 loosened to remov e the memor y module compar tment cov er 5.8 Bluetooth Module 1 loosened to remov e the Bluetooth module cov er 2 remov ed to remov e Bluetooth module 5.9 Key b o a r d 2 5.10 F an Assembly 4 loosened on f an assembly 4 remov ed on ther mal plate 5.11 Heat Sink 4 loosened 5.12 Processor 1 loosened
5â4 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Re mo val and R e placemen t Pr ocedur es Section Description # of Screws Remo ved 5.13 Inter nal Memor y Module 0 5.14 RT C B a t t e r y 0 5.15 T ouchP ad 1 5.16 Mini Card Module 2 5.17 Switch Cov er 3 5.18 Displa y Assemb ly 8 Ã T o pre v ent an unresponsiv e system and the displa y of a warning message, install only a Mini Card de vice authorized f or use in your computer b y the gov er nmental agency that regulates wireless de vices in yo ur countr y . If you install a de vice and then receive a w a rning message, remov e the device to restore computer functionality . Then contact Customer Care. 5.19 To p C o v e r 16 scre ws 5.20 Modem Module 2 5.21 System Board 4 screws 2 screw loc k s 5.22 System Board F rame 2 screw loc k s 3 screws 5.23 Serial Connector Module 0 5.26 USB/A udio Board 2 Disassembl y Sequence Char t (Continued)
R emo v al and Replace ment Pr ocedure s Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 5â5 5 .3 Preparing t he C om puter for Di sassem bl y Before you begin an y remo v al or installation procedures: 1. Shut do wn the computer . If you are unsure whether the computer is of f or in hibernation, turn the computer on, and then shut it do wn through the operating system. 2. Disconnect all external de vices connected to the computer . 3. Disconnect the po wer cord. 4. Remov e the battery by follo wing these steps: a. T urn the computer upside do wn with the rear panel to ward you. b . Slide the battery release latch on the right 1 and then the battery release latch on the left 2 to release the battery . c. Slide the battery pack 3 straight back and remov e it. R emo v ing the Battery P ack Re v erse the abov e procedure to install the battery pack. Battery Spare P ar t Number Inf ormation 8-cell, 4.8-AHr 372771-001
5â6 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Re mo val and R e placemen t Pr ocedur es 5 .4 H ard Dri v e 1. Prepare the computer for disassembly ( Section 5.3 ). Har d Drive Spare P art Number Information 7200 r pm 100 GB 80 GB 416415-001 417507-001 5400 r pm 120 GB 100 GB 80 GB 60 GB 416414-001 413853-001 413852-001 413851-001
R emo v al and Replace ment Pr ocedure s Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 5â7 2. Loosen the two Phillips PM2.0Ã5.0 scre ws 1 that secure the hard dri ve co v er to the computer . 3. Lift the left side of the hard dri ve co v er 2 and swing it to the right. 4. Remov e the hard driv e co ver . â The hard dri ve co v er is included in the Plastics Kit, spare part number 417527-001. R emo v ing the Har d Dr i v e C o ve r
5â8 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Re mo val and R e placemen t Pr ocedur es 5. Loosen the Phillips PM2.5Ã13.0 spring-loaded hard dri v e retention scre w 1 . 6. Grasp the mylar tab 2 on the left side of the hard dri v e and slide the hard dri v e to the right 3 to disconnect it from the system board. 7. Remov e the hard driv e 4 from the hard dri ve bay . R emo v ing the Har d Dr i v e
R emo v al and Replace ment Pr ocedure s Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 5â9 8. Remov e the four Phillips PM3.0Ã3.0 screws 1 that secure the hard dri ve frame to the hard dri ve. 9. Lift the frame 2 straight up to remov e if from the hard dri ve. R emo v ing the Har d Dr i v e F rame Re v erse the abov e procedure to reassemble and install the hard dri ve.
5â10 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Re mo val and R e placemen t Pr ocedur es 5. 5 C o m p u t e r F e e t The computer feet are adhesi v e-backed rubber pads. The feet are included in the Plastics Kit, spare part number 417527-001. R eplac ing the Com puter F eet
R emo v al and Replace ment Pr ocedure s Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 5â11 5 .6 O ptical Dri v e 1. Prepare the computer for disassembly ( Section 5.3 ). 2. Position the computer with the left side to ward you. 3. Remov e the T orx8 T8M2.5Ã4.0 scre w 1 that secures the optical dri ve to the computer . 4. Insert a flat-bladed scre wdri v er into the slot 2 on the bottom of the computer and push the tab . 5. Remov e the optical driv e 3 from the computer . R emo v ing the Opti cal Dr i v e Optical Drive Spare P art Number Information 8X Max D VD±RW and CD-R W Double-La y er Combo Dr iv e 4X Max D VD±RW and CD-R W Double-La y er Combo Dr iv e 24X Max D VD/CD-RW Combo Driv e 8X Max D VD-ROM drive 413702-001 413700-001 413701-001 413699-001
5â12 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Re mo val and R e placemen t Pr ocedur es 6. If it is necessary to replace the optical dri ve brack et, remov e the two Phillips PM2.0Ã3.0 scre ws 1 that secure the bracket to the optical dri v e. 7. Remov e the optical driv e bracket 2 . R emo v ing the Opti cal Dr i v e Br ack et Re v erse the abov e procedure to reassemble and install an optical dri ve.
R emo v al and Replace ment Pr ocedure s Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 5â13 5 .7 External Memor y Modul e 1. Prepare the computer for disassembly (refer to Section 5.3 ). 2. Position the computer with the front to ward you. Memory Module Spare P ar t Number Inf ormation PC2-5300 2048 MB 1024 MB 512 MB 256 MB 417506-001 414046-001 414045-001 414044-001 PC2-4200 2048 MB 1024 MB 512 MB 256 MB 417505-001 414042-001 414041-001 414040-001
5â14 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Re mo val and R e placemen t Pr ocedur es 3. Loosen the Phillips PM2.0Ã4.0 scre w 1 that secures the memory module compartment cov er to the computer . 4. Lift the right side of the cov er 2 and swing it up and to the left. 5. Remov e the memory module compartment cover . â The memory module compartment cov er is included in the Plastics Kit, spare part number 417527-001. R emo v ing the Memory Module Compartment Co ver
R emo v al and Replace ment Pr ocedure s Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 5â15 6. Spread the retaining tabs 1 on each side of the memory module socket to release the memory module. (The side of the module opposite the socket rises a way from the computer .) 7. Slide the module 2 aw ay from the socket at an angle. 8. Remov e the memory module. â Memory modules are designed with a notch 3 to pre vent incorrect installation into the memory module socket. R emo v ing the Exter nal Memory Module Re v erse the abov e procedure to install an external memory module.
5â16 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Re mo val and R e placemen t Pr ocedur es 5 .8 Bluetoot h Modul e 1. Prepare the computer for disassembly (refer to Section 5.3 ). 2. Position the computer with the right side to ward you. 3. Loosen the Phillips PM1.5Ã3.0 scre w 1 that secures the Bluetooth module cov er to the computer . 4. Remov e the Bluetooth module cover 2 from the computer . â The Bluetooth module cov er is included in the Plastics Kit, spare part number 417527-001. 5. Disconnect the Bluetooth module cable 3 from the system board. R emo v ing the Blueto oth Module Bluetooth Module Spare P ar t Number Information Bluetooth module (includes Blue tooth module cab le) 398393-001
R emo v al and Replace ment Pr ocedure s Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 5â17 6. Remov e the two Phillips PM1.5Ã3.0 screws 1 that secure the Bluetooth module to the Bluetooth module cov er . 7. Remov e the Bluetooth module 2 from the co ver . 8. Disconnect the Bluetooth module cable 3 from the module. R emo v ing the Blueto oth Module Co ver Re v erse the abov e procedure to install a Bluetooth module.
5â18 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Re mo val and R e placemen t Pr ocedur es 5. 9 Ke y b o a r d Ke yboard Spare P ar t Number Information K eyboards with pointing stick f or use in: Belgium Brazil The Czech Repub lic Denmark F rance F rench Canada Ger many Greece Hungar y Iceland Inter nationally Israel Italy Ja pan Ko r e a 416416-A41 416416-201 416416-221 416416-081 416416-051 416416-121 416416-041 416416-151 416416-211 416416-DD1 416416-B31 416416-BB1 416416-061 416416-291 416416-AD1 Latin America Norwa y P or tugal Russia Saudi Arabia Slov akia Slov enia Spain Sweden Switzerland Ta i w a n Thailand Tu r k e y The United Kingdom The United States 416416-161 416416-091 416416-131 416416-251 416416-171 416416-231 416416-BA1 416416-071 416416-101 416416-111 416416-AB1 416416-281 416416-141 416416-031 416416-001
R emo v al and Replace ment Pr ocedure s Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 5â19 1. Prepare the computer for disassembly ( Section 5.3 ). 2. Position the computer with the front to ward you. K eyboards without pointing stick f or use in: Belgium Brazil The Czech Repub lic Denmark F rance F rench Canada Ger many Greece Hungar y Iceland Inter nationally Israel Italy Ja pan Ko r e a 416417-A41 416417-201 416417-221 416417-081 416417-051 416417-121 416417-041 416417-151 416417-211 416417-DD1 416417-B31 416417-BB1 416417-061 416417-291 416417-AD1 Latin America Norwa y P or tugal Russia Saudi Arabia Slov akia Slov enia Spain Sweden Switzerland Ta i w a n Thailand Tu r k e y The United Kingdom The United States 416417-161 416417-091 416417-131 416417-251 416417-171 416417-231 416417-BA1 416417-071 416417-101 416417-111 416417-AB1 416417-281 416417-141 416417-031 416417-001 Ke yboard Spare P ar t Number Information (Continued)
5â20 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Re mo val and R e placemen t Pr ocedur es 3. Remov e the two T orx8 T8M2.5Ã1 0.0 scre ws that secure the ke yboard to the computer . R emo v ing the K ey boar d Scr ew s
R emo v al and Replace ment Pr ocedure s Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 5â21 4. T urn the computer display side up with the front to ward you. 5. Open the computer as far as possible. 6. Slide the four ke yboard retention tabs 1 to ward you. The tabs are located between the esc and f1 ke ys, between the f4 and f5 ke ys, between the f8 and f9 ke ys, and between the f12 and delete ke ys. 7. Lift the rear edge of the ke yboard 2 and swing it to ward you until it rests on the palm rest. R eleasing the K ey board
5â2 2 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Re mo val and R e placemen t Pr ocedur es 8. Release the zero insertion force (ZIF) connector 1 to which the ke yboard cable is connected and disconnect the ke yboard cable 2 from the system board. â Step 9 applies to models with ke yboards with pointing sticks. 9. Release the ZIF connector 3 to which the pointing stick cable is connected and disconnect the pointing stick cable 4 from the system board. Disconnec ting the K e y boar d and P ointing S tick C able s 10. Remov e the keyboard. Re v erse the abov e procedure to install the ke yboard.
R emo v al and Replace ment Pr ocedure s Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 5â2 3 5. 1 0 Fa n A s s e m b l y 1. Prepare the computer for disassembly ( Section 5.3 ). 2. Release the ke yboard ( Section 5.9 ). F an Assembl y Spare P ar t Number Information F an assembly 416409-001
5â2 4 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Re mo val and R e placemen t Pr ocedur es 3. Disconnect the fan cable 1 from the system board. â The follo wing scre ws should be remo ved, then installed, in the 1, 2, 3, 4 sequence stamped on the fan assembly . 4. Loosen the two Phillips PM2.0Ã3.0 scre ws 2 and the two Phillips PM2.5Ã7.0 scre ws 3 that secure the fan assembly to the computer . 5. Remov e the fan assembly 4 . â Due to the adhesi v e quality of the thermal paste located between the video heat sink and video board, it may be necessary to mov e the heat sink fr om side to side to detach the heat sink from the video board. R emo v ing the F an Assembl y
R emo v al and Replace ment Pr ocedure s Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 5â2 5 â The thermal paste should be thoroughly cleaned from the surfaces of the video board 1 and video heat sink 2 each time the fan assembly is remo v ed. Thermal paste is included with all fan assembly and system board spare part kits. R eplac ing the T hermal P ast e
5â2 6 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Re mo val and R e placemen t Pr ocedur es â The follo wing scre ws should be remo ved, then installed, in the 1, 2, 3, 4 sequence stamped on the thermal plate. 6. Remov e the four T orx8 T8M2.5Ã6.0 scre ws 1 that secure the thermal plate to the computer . 7. Remov e the thermal plate 2 . â Due to the adhesi v e quality of the thermal paste located between the thermal plate and video board, it may be necessary to mov e the thermal plate from side to side to detach the thermal plate from the video board. R emo v ing the T hermal P l ate
R emo v al and Replace ment Pr ocedure s Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 5â2 7 â The thermal paste should be thoroughly cleaned from the surfaces of the thermal plate 1 and video board 2 each time the thermal plate is remov ed. R eplac ing the T hermal P ast e Re v erse the abov e procedure to install the fan assembly and thermal plate.
5â2 8 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Re mo val and R e placemen t Pr ocedur es 5 . 1 1 Hea t Sink 1. Prepare the computer for disassembly ( Section 5.3 ). 2. Release the ke yboard ( Section 5.9 ). 3. Remov e the fan assembly ( Section 5.10 ). Heat Sink Spare P art Number Information Heat sink (includes ther mal paste) 416408-001
R emo v al and Replace ment Pr ocedure s Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 5â29 â The follo wing scre ws should be loosened and installed in the 1, 2, 3, 4 sequence stamped on the heat sink. 4. Loosen the four Phillips PM2.5Ã8.0 shoulder scre ws 1 that secure the heat sink to the computer . â Due to the adhesi v e quality of the thermal paste located between the heat sink and processor , it may be necessary to mov e the heat sink from side to side to detach the heat sink from the processor . 5. Lift the right side of the heat sink 2 until it disengages from the processor . 6. Slide the heat sink 3 to the right and remov e it. R emo v ing the Heat Sink
5â30 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Re mo val and R e placemen t Pr ocedur es â The thermal paste should be thoroughly cleaned from the surfaces of the heat sink 1 and processor 2 each time the heat sink is remov ed. Thermal paste is included with all heat sink and processor spare part kits. R eplac ing the T hermal P ast e Re v erse the abov e procedure to install the heat sink.
R emo v al and Replace ment Pr ocedure s Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 5â31 5. 1 2 P r o c e s s o r 1. Prepare the computer for disassembly ( Section 5.3 ) and remov e the follo wing components: a. K eyboard ( Section 5.9 ) b . F an assembly ( Section 5.10 ) c. Heat sink ( Section 5.11 ). Pr ocessor Spare P art Number Information Intel Core Duo T2600 (2.16-GHz) processor Intel Core Duo T2500 (2.00-GHz) processor Intel Core Duo T2400 (1.83-GHz) processor Intel Core Duo T2300 (1.67-GHz) processor 413686-001 413685-001 413684-001 413683-001
5â3 2 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Re mo val and R e placemen t Pr ocedur es 2. Use a flat-bladed scre wdri v er to turn the processor locking scre w 1 one-quarter turn counterclockwise until you hear ac l i c k . 3. Lift the processor 2 straight up and remov e it . â The gold triangle 3 on the processor should be aligned with the triangle icon 4 embossed on the processor socket when you install the processor. R emo v ing the Pr ocessor Re v erse the abov e procedure to install the processor .
R emo v al and Replace ment Pr ocedure s Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 5â33 5 . 1 3 Internal Memor y Modul e 1. Prepare the computer for disassembly ( Section 5.3 ). 2. Release the ke yboard ( Section 5.9 ). Memory Module Spare P ar t Number Inf ormation PC2-5300 2048 MB 1024 MB 512 MB 256 MB 417506-001 414046-001 414045-001 414044-001 PC2-4200 2048 MB 1024 MB 512 MB 256 MB 417505-001 414042-001 414041-001 414040-001
5â3 4 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Re mo val and R e placemen t Pr ocedur es 3. Spread the retaining tabs 1 on each side of the memory module socket to release the memory module board. (The side of the module opposite the socket rises a way from the computer .) 4. Slide the module aw ay from the socket at an angle 2 . 5. Remov e the memory module. â Memory modules are designed with a notch 3 to pre vent incorrect installation into the memory module socket. R emo v ing the Inte rnal Me mory Module Re v erse the abov e procedure to install an internal memory module.
R emo v al and Replace ment Pr ocedure s Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 5â35 5. 1 4 R TC B a t t e r y â The R TC battery is included in the Plastics Kit, spare part number 417527-001. 1. Prepare the computer for disassembly ( Section 5.3 ). 2. Release the ke yboard ( Section 5.9 ). 3. Remov e the R TC battery from the clip in the top cov er . R emo v ing the R T C Bat tery Re v erse the abov e procedure to install an R TC battery .
5â3 6 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Re mo val and R e placemen t Pr ocedur es 5. 1 5 To u c h Pa d 1. Prepare the computer for disassembly ( Section 5.3 ). 2. Remov e the keyboard ( Section 5.9 ). 3. T urn the computer upside do wn with the front to ward you. 4. Remov e the T orx8 T8M2.5Ã10.0 scre w that secures the T ouchPad to the computer . R emo v ing the T ouchP ad Sc r e w T ouchP ad Spare P ar t Number Information T ouchP ad with 3 T ouchP ad buttons T ouchP ad with 2 T ouchP ad buttons 382675-001 382676-001
R emo v al and Replace ment Pr ocedure s Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 5â3 7 5. T urn the computer display-side up with the front to ward you. 6. Open the computer as far as possible. 7. Lift up on the rear edge of the T ouchPad 1 until it disengages from the computer . 8. Slide the T ouchPad back 2 until it rests on the computer . R eleasing the T ouchP ad
5â3 8 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Re mo val and R e placemen t Pr ocedur es 9. Disconnect the T ouchPad cable 1 from the system board. 10. Remov e the T ouchPad 2 . R emo v ing the T ouchP ad Re v erse the abov e procedure to install the T ouchPad.
R emo v al and Replace ment Pr ocedure s Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 5â3 9 5. 1 6 M i n i C a r d M o d u l e Mini Car d Module Spare P ar t Number Information 802.11 b/g HS WLAN module f or use in Nor th America 407253-001 802.11 b/g HS WLAN module f or use in the RO W countries listed below . 407253-002 China Ecuador Haiti Honduras P akistan Pe r u Qatar South K orea Uruguay V enezuela 802.11 b/g HS WLAN module f or use in Japan 407253-291 802.11 b/g LJ WLAN module f or use in Nor th America 407254-001 802.11 b/g LJ WLAN module f or use in the R O W countries listed below . 407254-002 China Ecuador Haiti Honduras P akistan Pe r u Qatar South K orea Uruguay V enezuela 802.11 b/g LJ WLAN module f or use in J apan 407254-291 802.11a/b/g GL WLAN module f o r use in the MO W1 countr ies listed below . 407575-001 Antigua & Barb uda Argentina Au s t ra l i a Bahamas Barbados Brunei Canada Chile Dominican Repub lic Guam Guatemala Hong K ong Pa n a m a India Indonesia Mala ysia Me xico Ne w Zealand Pa r a g u ay Saudi Arabia Ta i w a n The United States Vietnam
5â40 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Re mo val and R e placemen t Pr ocedur es 1. Prepare the computer for disassembly ( Section 5.3 ). 2. Remov e the keyboard ( Section 5.9 ). 3. Remov e the T ouchPad ( Section 5.15 ). 802.11 a/b/g GL WLAN module f or use in the MO W2 countr ies listed below: 407575-002 Aruba Au s t r i a Azerbaijan Bahrain Belgium Ber muda Bulgaria Ca yman Islands Columbia Croatia Cyprus Czech Repub lic Denmark Eg ypt El Salv ador Estonia Finland Fr a n c e Georgia Ger many Greece Hungar y Iceland Ireland Italy Latvia Lebanon The Philippines Po l a n d P or tugal Romania Russia Serbia and Montenegro Singapore Slov akia Liechtenstein Lithuania Lux embourg Malta Monaco The Netherlands Norwa y Oman Slov enia South Africa Spain Sri Lanka Sweden Switzerland Tu r k e y The United Kingdom Uzbekistan 802.11 a/b/g GL WLAN module f or use in the R O W countries listed below . 407575-003 China Ecuador Haiti Honduras P akistan Pe r u Qatar South K orea Uruguay V enezuela 802.11 a/b/g GL WLAN module f or use in Japan 407575-291 Mini Car d Module Spare P ar t Number Information (Continued)
R emo v al and Replace ment Pr ocedure s Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 5â41 4. Make note of which antenna cable is attached to which antenna clip on the Mini Ca rd module before disconnecting the cables, then disconnect the auxiliary and main antenna cables 1 from the Mini Card module. 5. Remov e the two Phillips PM2.0Ã4.0 screws 2 that secure the Mini Card module to the computer . (The edge of the module opposite the socket rises a way from the computer .) 6. Remov e the Mini Card module by pulling the module 3 aw ay from the socket at an angle. â Mini Card modules are designed with a notch 4 to pre vent incorrect installation. R emo v ing a Mini C ar d Module Re v erse the abov e procedure to install a Mini Card module.
5â4 2 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Re mo val and R e placemen t Pr ocedur es 5. 1 7 Sw i t c h C ove r â Both switch cov er spare part kits include the LED board and LED board cable. 1. Prepare the computer for disassembly ( Section 5.3 ). 2. Remov e the keyboard ( Section 5.9 ). 3. T urn the computer upside do wn with the rear panel to ward you. 4. Remov e the 3 Phillips PM2.0Ã2.0 screws that secure the switch cov er to the computer . R emo v ing the S w itc h Co ver S c r e w s Switch Co ver Spare Part Number Information F or use with nw8440 and nc8430 models F or use with nx8420 models 416405-001 416406-001
R emo v al and Replace ment Pr ocedure s Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 5â43 5. T urn the computer display-side up with the front to ward you. 6. Open the computer as far as possible. 7. Use a flat-bladed scre wdri ve r to lift up the left and right hinge cov er sections of the switch co ver 1 to detach it from the computer . 8. Swing the rear edge of the switch cov er 2 up and to ward you. R eleasing the S w itc h Co ve r
5â44 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Re mo val and R e placemen t Pr ocedur es 9. Disconnect the LED board cable 1 from the system board. 10. Remov e the switch cover 2 . R emo v ing the S w itc h Co ver Re v erse the abov e procedure to install the switch cov er .
R emo v al and Replace ment Pr ocedure s Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 5â45 5 . 1 8 Displa y Asse mbl y 1. Prepare the computer for disassembly ( Section 5.3 ) and remo ve the follo wing components: a. K eyboard ( Section 5.9 ) b . Switch co ver ( Section 5.17 ) c. T ouchPad ( Section 5.15 ) Displa y Assembl y Spare P ar t Number Information 15.4-inch, WUXGA 15.4-inch, WSXGA 15.4-inch, WXGA 416413-001 416412-001 416411-001
5â4 6 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Re mo val and R e placemen t Pr ocedur es 2. Make note of which antenna cable is attached to which antenna clip on the Mini Ca rd module before disconnecting the cables, then disconnect the wireless antenna cables 1 from the Mini Card module. 3. Remov e the wireless antenna cables from the top cover clips ( 2 and 3 ) through which they are routed. 4. Disconnect the display cable 4 from the system board. Disconnec ting the W ir eles s Ant enna and Displa y Ca bles
R emo v al and Replace ment Pr ocedure s Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 5â4 7 5. Remov e the two T orx8 T8M2.5Ã10.0 scre ws 1 and the two Phillips PM2.0Ã2.0 scre ws 2 that secure the display assembly to the computer . R emo v ing the Displa y Assembl y Sc r ew s
5â4 8 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Re mo val and R e placemen t Pr ocedur es 6. Position the computer with the rear panel to ward you. 7. Remov e the four T orx8 T8M2.5Ã10.0 scre ws 1 that secure the display assembly to the computer . 8. Lift the display assembly 2 straight up to remov e it. R emo v ing the Displa y Assembl y Re v erse the abov e procedure to install the display assembly .
R emo v al and Replace ment Pr ocedure s Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 5â4 9 5. 1 9 T o p C ove r 1. Prepare the computer for disassembly ( Section 5.3 ) and remo ve the follo wing components: a. Hard dri ve ( Section 5.4 ) b . Optical dri ve ( Section 5.6 ) c. K eyboard ( Section 5.9 ) d. Fan assembly ( Section 5.10 ) e. Switch cov er ( Section 5.17 ) f. T ouchPad ( Section 5.15 ) g. Display assembly ( Section 5.18 ) 2. T urn the computer upside do wn with the front to ward you. T op Co ver Spare Part Number Information F or use with nw8440 models with finger print reader F or use with nw8440 models without finger print reader F or use with nc8430 and nx8420 m odels with finger print reader F or use with nc8430 and nx8420 models without fingerpr int reader 418807-001 416401-001 416403-001 416042-001 Finger print reader board with cable 416400-001
5â5 0 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Re mo val and R e placemen t Pr ocedur es 3. Remov e the two rubber scre w cov ers 1 and the ele v en T orx8 T8M2.5Ã10.0 scre ws 2 that secure the top cov er to the computer . â The rubber scre w cov ers are a v ailable in the Screw Kit, spare part number 416419-001. R emo v ing the T op Co ver S cr ew s, P art 1
R emo v al and Replace ment Pr ocedure s Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 5â51 4. T urn the computer right-side up with the front to ward you. 5. Disconnect the speaker cable 1 from the system board. â Step 6 applies only to computer models with a f ingerprint reader . 6. Disconnect the f ingerprint reader cable 2 from the system board. 7. Remov e the four T orx8 T8M2.5Ã4.0 scre ws 3 that secure the top cov er to the computer . R emo v ing the T op Co ver S cr ew s, P art 2
5â5 2 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Re mo val and R e placemen t Pr ocedur es 8. Lift the front edge of the top cov er 1 until it disengages from the base enclosure. 9. Lift the top cov er 2 straight up and remove it. R emo v ing the T op Co ver Re v erse the abov e procedure to install the top cov er .
R emo v al and Replace ment Pr ocedure s Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 5â5 3 5 .20 Modem Modul e 1. Prepare the computer for disassembly ( Section 5.3 ) and remo ve the follo wing components: a. Hard dri ve ( Section 5.4 ) b . Optical dri ve ( Section 5.6 ) c. K eyboard ( Section 5.9 ) d. Switch cov er ( Section 5.17 ) e. T ouchPad ( Section 5.15 ) f. Display assembly ( Section 5.18 ) g. T op cov er ( Section 5.19 ) Modem Module Spare P art Number Information Modem module 413691-001
5â5 4 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Re mo val and R e placemen t Pr ocedur es 2. Remov e the two Phillips PM2.5Ã4.0 screws 1 that secure the modem board to the system board. 3. Lift the right side of the modem module 2 to disconnect it from the system board. 4. Disconnect the modem cable 3 from the modem module. 5. Remov e the modem module. R emo v ing the Modem Module Re v erse the abov e procedure to install the modem module.
R emo v al and Replace ment Pr ocedure s Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 5â5 5 5. 2 1 Sys t e m B o a r d â When replacing the system board, be sure that the follo wing components are remov ed from the defectiv e system board and installed on the replacement system board: â Memory modules ( Section 5.7 and Section 5.13 ) â Processor ( Section 5.12 ) â R TC battery ( Section 5.14) â Mini Card module ( Section 5.16 ) â Modem module ( Section 5.20 ) System Boar d Spare P art Number Information System board (includes R T C batter y and 256-MB of video memor y) 416397-001
5â5 6 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Re mo val and R e placemen t Pr ocedur es 1. Prepare the computer for disassembly ( Section 5.3 ) and remov e the follo wing components: a. Hard dri ve ( Section 5.4 ) b . Optical dri ve ( Section 5.6 ) c. Bluetooth module ( Section 5.8 ) d. K e yboard ( Section 5.9 ) e. Fan assembly ( Section 5.10 ) f. Heat sink ( Section 5.11 ) g. T ouchPad ( Section 5.15 ) h. Switch cov er ( Section 5.17 ) i. Display assembly ( Section 5.18 ) j. T op cov er ( Section 5.19 ) 2. Position the computer with the rear panel to ward you.
R emo v al and Replace ment Pr ocedure s Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 5â5 7 3. Disconnect the follo wing cables from the system board: 1 Serial connector module cable 2 Modem cable 3 USB board cable 4 Audio board cable 5 Modem cable Disconnec ting the S ys tem Boar d Cables
5â5 8 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Re mo val and R e placemen t Pr ocedur es 4. Remov e the following: 1 T wo T orx T8M2.5Ã6.0 scre ws 2 T wo T orx T8M2.5Ã4.0 scre ws 3 T wo HM5.0Ã10.0 scre w locks on each side of the external monitor connector R emo v ing the S y stem Boar d Scr ew s and Scr e w L ocks
R emo v al and Replace ment Pr ocedure s Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 5â5 9 5. Remov e the modem cable 1 from the clip in the base enclosure. 6. Remov e the modem cable 2 from the clips in the system board. 7. Remov e the modem connector 3 from the clip in the base enclosure. R eleasing the S y stem Boar d, P art 1
5â60 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Re mo val and R e placemen t Pr ocedur es 8. Flex the right side of the base enclosure 1 until the USB 2 , 1394 3 , and RJ-45 connectors 4 are clear of the base enclosure. 9. Lift the left side of the system board 5 until it rests at an angle. R eleasing the S y stem Boar d, P art 2
R emo v al and Replace ment Pr ocedure s Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 5â61 10. Lift the front edge of the system board 1 until it rests at an angle. 11. Slide the system board 2 forward until the rear -right section of the system board 3 is clear of the scre w boss 4 on the system board frame. 12. Remov e the system board 5 from the base enclosure. R emo v ing the S y stem Boar d Re v erse the abov e procedure to install the system board.
5â6 2 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Re mo val and R e placemen t Pr ocedur es 5 .2 2 S y s tem Board Frame 1. Prepare the computer for disassembly ( Section 5.3 ) and remov e the follo wing components: a. Hard dri ve ( Section 5.4 ) b . Optical dri ve ( Section 5.6 ) c. Bluetooth module ( Section 5.8 ) d. K e yboard ( Section 5.9 ) e. Fan assembly ( Section 5.10 ) f. Heat sink ( Section 5.11 ) g. T ouchPad ( Section 5.15 ) h. Switch cov er ( Section 5.17 ) i. Display assembly ( Section 5.18 ) j. T op cov er ( Section 5.19 ) k. System board ( Section 5.21 ) 2. Position the computer with the rear panel to ward you. System Boar d Frame Spare P art Number Information System board frame (includes modem cab le) 416407-001
R emo v al and Replace ment Pr ocedure s Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 5â63 3. Remov e the two Hex HM5.0Ã12.0 scre w locks 1 on each side of the serial connector . 4. Remov e the three T orx8 T8M2.5Ã6.0 scre ws 2 that secure the system board frame to the base enclosure. 5. Remov e the audio board and USB board cables 3 from the base enclosure. 6. Lift the rear edge of the system board frame 4 until it disengages from the base enclosure. 7. Remov e the system board frame. R emo v e the S ys tem Boar d F r ame
5â64 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Re mo val and R e placemen t Pr ocedur es 8. If it is necessary to replace the modem cable, remov e the modem connector and cable 1 from the clips 2 in the system board frame. R emo v ing the Modem Ca ble Re v erse the abov e procedures to install the system board frame.
R emo v al and Replace ment Pr ocedure s Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 5â6 5 5 .2 3 Serial C onnec tor Modul e 1. Prepare the computer for disassembly ( Section 5.3 ) and remov e the follo wing components: a. Hard dri ve ( Section 5.4 ) b . Optical dri ve ( Section 5.6 ) c. Bluetooth module ( Section 5.8 ) d. K e yboard ( Section 5.9 ) e. Fan assembly ( Section 5.10 ) f. Heat sink ( Section 5.11 ) g. T ouchPad ( Section 5.15 ) h. Switch cov er ( Section 5.17 ) i. Display assembly ( Section 5.18 ) j. T op cov er ( Section 5.19 ) k. System board ( Section 5.21 ) l. System board frame ( Section 5.22 ) 2. Position the system board frame with the rear panel to ward you. Serial Connector Module Spare P ar t Number Information Serial connector module and cable 416399-001
5â6 6 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Re mo val and R e placemen t Pr ocedur es 3. Remov e the serial connector module cable 1 from the clips in the system board frame. 4. Remov e the serial connector module 2 from the system board frame. R emo v ing the Se ri al C onnect or Module and Ca ble Re v erse the abov e procedure to install the serial connector module.
R emo v al and Replace ment Pr ocedure s Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 5â6 7 5 .2 4 USB/Au dio Bo ard 1. Prepare the computer for disassembly ( Section 5.3 ) and remov e the follo wing components: a. Hard dri ve ( Section 5.4 ) b . Optical dri ve ( Section 5.6 ) c. Bluetooth module ( Section 5.8 ) d. K e yboard ( Section 5.9 ) e. Fan assembly ( Section 5.10 ) f. Heat sink ( Section 5.11 ) g. T ouchPad ( Section 5.15 ) h. Switch cov er ( Section 5.17 ) i. Display assembly ( Section 5.18 ) j. T op cov er ( Section 5.19 ) k. System board ( Section 5.21 ) l. System board frame ( Section 5.22 ) 2. Position the base enclosure with the front to ward you. USB/A udio Boar d Spare P ar t Number Information USB/audio board (includes USB board cable and audio board cable) 416398-001
5â6 8 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Re mo val and R e placemen t Pr ocedur es 3. Remov e the two T orx8 T8M2.5Ã4.0 scre ws 1 that secure the USB/audio board to the base enclosure. 4. Lift the left side of the USB/audio board 2 to disengage it from the base enclosure. R emo v ing the U SB/Audi o Boar d Re v erse the abov e procedure to install the USB/audio board.
Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 6â1 6 Spec ifica tions This chapter provides physical and performance specif ications. Ta b l e 6 - 1 Computer Dimensions Metric U .S. Height (front to back) Width Depth 2.8 to 3.3 cm 35.8 cm 25.9 cm 1.1 to 1.3 in 14.1 in 10.2 in W eight 2.81 kg 6.2 lbs Input P ower Operating v oltage Operating current 19.0 V dc @ 4.74 A â 90 W 4.74 A T e mperature Operating (not writing to optical disc) Operating (writing to optical disc) Nonoperating 0°C to 35°C 5°C to 35°C -20°C to 60°C 32°F to 95°F 41°F to 95°F -4°F to 140°F
6â2 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Spe cificat ion s Relative humidity (noncondensing) Operating Nonoperating 10% to 90% 5% to 95% 10% to 90% 5% to 95% Maximum altitude (unpressurized) Operating (14.7 to 10.1 psia) Nonoperating (14.7 to 4.4 psia) -15 m to 3,048 m -15 m to 12,192 m -50 ft to 10,000 ft -50 ft to 40,000 ft Shock Operating Nonoperating 125 g, 2 ms, half-sine 200 g, 2 ms, half-sine Random Vibration Operating Nonoperating 0.75 g zero-to-peak, 10 Hz to 500 Hz, 0.25 oct/min s weep r ate 1.50 g zero-to-peak, 10 Hz to 500 Hz, 0.5 oct/min s weep r ate â Applicable product safety standards specify thermal limits for plastic surfaces. The computer operates well within this range of temperatures. Ta b l e 6 - 1 Computer (Continued)
Spe cificat ion s Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 6â3 Ta b l e 6 - 2 15.4-inch, WUXGA WV A Dimensions Height Width Diagonal 20.7 cm 33.1 cm 39.1 cm 8.1 in 13.0 in 15.4 in Number of colors Up to 16.8 million Contrast ratio 200:1 Brightness 180 nits typical Pixel resolution Pitch Fo r m a t Configuration 0.172 à 0.172 mm 1920 à 1200 RGB v er tical str ipe Backlight CCFT Character display 80 à 25 T otal power consumption 6.0 W Viewing angle /-65° horizontal, /-50° v er tical typical
6â4 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Spe cificat ion s Ta b l e 6 - 3 15.4-inch, WSXGA WV A Dimensions Height Width Diagonal 20.7 cm 33.1 cm 39.1 cm 8.1 in 13.0 in 15.4 in Number of colors Up to 16.8 million Contrast ratio 200:1 Brightness 180 nits typical Pixel resolution Pitch Fo r m a t Configuration 0.197 à 0.197 mm 1680 à 1050 RGB v er tical str ipe Backlight CCFT Character display 80 à 25 T otal power consumption 7.0 W Viewing angle /-60° horizontal, 40/-50° v er tical typical
Spe cificat ion s Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 6â5 Ta b l e 6 - 4 15.4-inch, WXGA WV A Dimensions Height Width Diagonal 20.7 cm 33.1 cm 39.1 cm 8.1 in 13.0 in 15.4 in Number of colors Up to 16.8 million Contrast ratio 200:1 Brightness 180 nits typical Pixel resolution Pitch Fo r m a t Configuration 0.259 à 0.259 mm 1440 à 900 RGB v er tical str ipe Backlight CCFT Character display 80 à 25 T otal power consumption 6.5 W Viewing angle /-45° horizontal, 15/-35° v er tical typical
6â6 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Spe cificat ion s Ta b l e 6 - 5 Har d Drives 120-GB* 100-GB* 80-GB* 60-GB* Dimensions Height Width We i g h t 9.5 mm 70 mm 99 g 9.5 mm 70 mm 99 g 9.5 mm 70 mm 99 g 9.5 mm 70 mm 99 g Interface type SA T A SA T A SA T A SA T A T ransfer rate Synchronous (maximum) Security 100 MB/sec ATA security 100 MB/sec ATA security 100 MB/sec ATA s e c u r i t y 100 MB/sec ATA security Seek times (typical read, including setting) Single trac k Ave r a g e Maximum 3 ms 13 ms 24 ms 3 ms 13 ms 24 ms 3 ms 13 ms 24 ms 3 ms 13 ms 24 ms Logical bloc ks â 234,436,400 195,363,650 156,301,488 117,210,240 Disc rotational speed 5400 r pm 7200 and 5400 r pm 7200 and 5400 r pm 5400 r pm Operating temperature 5°C to 55°C (41°F to 131°F) â Certain restrictions and exclusi ons apply. Consult Customer Care for details. *1 GB = 1 billion b ytes when ref erring to hard dr iv e storage capacity . Actual accessible capacity is less . â Actual drive specificatio ns ma y differ slightly .
Spe cificat ion s Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 6â7 Ta b l e 6 - 6 D VD±R W and CD-R W Double-La yer Combo Drive Applicable disc Read: DV D - R , DV D - R W, D VD-ROM (D VD-5, D VD-9, DV D - 1 0 , DV D - 1 8 ) , CD-R OM (Mode 1 and 2) CD Digital A udio CD-XA ready (Mode 2, F or m 1 and 2) CD-I ready (Mode 2, F or m 1 and 2) CD-R, CD-R W Photo CD (single and multisession) CD-Bridge Write: CD-R and CD-R W D VD-R and DV D - R W Center hole diameter 1.5 cm (0.59 in) Disc diameter Standard disc Mini disc 12 cm (4.72 in) 8 cm (3.15 in)
6â8 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Spe cificat ion s Disc thickness 1.2 mm (0.047 in) T rack pitc h 0.74 µm Access time CD D VD Random Full strok e < 175 ms < 285 ms < 230 ms < 335 ms A udio output level A udio-out, 0.7 Vr ms Cache b uffer 2 MB Data transfer rate CD-R (16X) CD-R W (8X) CD-R OM (24X) DV D ( 8 X ) D VD-R (4X) DV D - R W ( 2 X ) Multiword DMA mode 2 2,400 KB/s (150 KB/s at 1X CD rate) 1,200 KB/s (150 KB/s at 1X CD rate) 3,600 KB/s (150 KB/s at 1X CD rate) 10,800 KB/s (1,352 KB/s at 1X D VD rate) 5,400 KB/s (1,352 KB/s at 1X D VD rate) 2,700 KB/s (1,352 KB/s at 1X D VD rate) 16.6 MB/s Star tup time < 15 seconds Stop time < 6 seconds Ta b l e 6 - 6 D VD±R W and CD-R W Double-La yer Combo Drive (Continued)
Spe cificat ion s Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 6â9 Ta b l e 6 - 7 D VD/CD-R W Combo Drive D VD-ROM drive Applicable disc Read: DV D - R , DV D - R W, D VD-ROM (D VD-5, D VD-9, DV D - 1 0 , DV D - 1 8 ) , CD-R OM (Mode 1 and 2) CD Digital A udio CD-XA ready (Mode 2, F or m 1 and 2) CD-I ready (Mode 2, F or m 1 and 2) CD-R, CD-R W Photo CD (single and multisession) CD-Bridge Write: CD-R and CD-R W Center hole diameter 1.5 cm (0.59 in) Disc diameter Standard disc Mini disc 12 cm (4.72 in) 8 cm (3.15 in)
6â10 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Spe cificat ion s Disc thickness 1.2 mm (0.047 in) T rack pitc h 0.74 µm Access time CD D VD Random Full strok e < 110 ms < 210 ms < 130 ms < 225 ms A udio output level A udio-out, 0.7 Vr ms Cache b uffer 2 MB Data transfer rate CD-R (24X) CD-R W (10X) CD-R OM (24X) DV D ( 8 X ) Multiword DMA mode 2 3,600 KB/s (150 KB/s at 1X CD rate) 1,500 KB/s (150 KB/s at 1X CD rate) 3,600 KB/s (150 KB/s at 1X CD rate) 10,800 KB/s (1,352 KB/s at 1X D VD rate) 16.6 MB/s Star tup time < 15 seconds Stop time < 6 seconds Ta b l e 6 - 7 D VD/CD-R W Combo Drive (Continued)
Spe cificat ion s Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 6â11 Ta b l e 6 - 8 DV D - R O M D r i v e Applicable disc DV D - R O M ( DV D - 5 , DV D - 9 , DV D - 1 0 , DV D - 1 8 ) CD-R OM (Mode 1 and 2) CD Digital A udio CD-XA ready (Mode 2, F orm 1 and 2) CD-I ready (Mode 2, F or m 1 and 2) CD-R CD-R W Photo CD (single and multisession) CD-Bridge Center hole diameter 1.5 cm (0.59 in) Disc diameter Standard disc Mini disc 12 cm (4.72 in) 8 cm (3.15 in) Disc thickness 1.2 mm (0.047 in) T rack pitc h 0.74 µm Access time CD D VD Random Full strok e < 100 ms < 175 ms < 125 ms < 225 ms A udio output level Line-out, 0.7 Vr ms Cache b uffer 512 MB Data transfer rate CD-R (24X) CD-R W (10X) CD-R OM (24X) DV D ( 8 X ) Multiword DMA mode 2 3,600 KB/s (150 KB/s at 1X CD rate) 1,500 KB/s (150 KB/s at 1X CD rate) 3,600 KB/s (150 KB/s at 1X CD rate) 10,800 KB/s (1,352 KB/s at 1X D VD rate) 16.6 MB/s Star tup time < 15 seconds Stop time < 6 seconds
6â12 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Spe cificat ion s Ta b l e 6 - 9 System DMA Hard ware DMA System Function DMA0 Not applicable DMA1* Not applicable DMA2* Not applicable DMA3 Not applicable DMA4 Direct memor y access controller DMA5* A vailab le f or PC Card DMA6 Not assigned DMA7 Not assigned *PC Card controller ca n use DMA 1, 2, or 5.
Spe cificat ion s Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 6â13 T a bl e 6-10 System Interrupts Hard ware IRQ System Function IRQ0 System timer IRQ1 Standard 101-/102-K ey or Microsoft Natural K eyboard IRQ2 Cascaded IRQ3 Intel 82801DB/DBM USB2 Enhanced Host Controllerâ24CD IRQ4 COM1 IRQ5* Cone xant A CâLink A udio Intel 82801DB/DBM SMBus Controllerâ24C3 Data F ax Modem with Smar tCP IRQ6 Diskette driv e IRQ7* P arallel por t IRQ8 System CMOS/real-time clock IRQ9* Microsoft A CPI-compliant system IRQ10* Intel USB UHCI controllerâ24C2 Intel 82852/82855 GM/GME Graphic Controller Realtek R TL8139 F amily PCI f ast Ether net Controller
6â14 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Spe cificat ion s IRQ11 Intel USB EHCI controllerâ24CD Intel USB UHCI controllerâ24C4 Intel USB UHCI controllerâ24C7 Intel Pro/Wireless 2200BG TI OHCI 1394 host controller TI PCI1410 CardBus controller IRQ12 Synaptics PS/2 T ouchP ad IRQ13 Numeric data processor IRQ14 Primar y IDE channel IRQ15 Secondar y IDE channel *Def ault configuration; audio possib le configurations are IRQ5, IRQ7, IRQ9, IRQ10, or none. â PC Cards may assert IRQ3, IRQ4, IR Q5, IRQ7, IRQ9, IRQ10, IRQ11, or IRQ15. Either the infrared or the se rial port may assert IRQ3 or IRQ4. T a bl e 6-10 System Interrupts (Continued)
Spe cificat ion s Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 6â15 T able 6-11 System I/O Addresses I/O Address (he x) System Function (shipping configuration) 000 - 00F DMA controller no . 1 010 - 01F Unused 020 - 021 Interrupt controller no . 1 022 - 024 Opti chipset configur ation registers 025 - 03F Unused 02E - 02F 87334 âSuper I/Oâ configuration f or CPU 040 - 05F Counter/timer registers 044 - 05F Unused 060 K eyboard controller 061 P or t B 062 - 063 U nused 064 K eyboard controller 065 - 06F Unused 070 - 071 N MI enable/R TC 072 - 07F Unused 080 - 08F DMA page registers 090 - 091 U nused 092 P or t A 093 - 09F Unused 0A0 - 0A1 Interrupt controller no . 2
6â16 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Spe cificat ion s I/O Address (he x) System Function (shipping configuration) 0A2 - 0BF Unused 0C0 - 0DF DMA controller no . 2 0E0 - 0EF Unused 0F0 - 0F1 Coprocessor busy clear/reset 0F2 - 0FF Unused 100 - 16F Unused 170 - 177 S econdar y fix ed disk controller 178 - 1EF Unused 1F0 - 1F7 Primar y fixed disk controller 1F8 - 200 Unused 201 Jo yStick (decoded in ESS1688) 202 - 21F Unused 220 - 22F Enter tainment audio 230 - 26D Unused 26E - 26 Unused 278 - 27F Unused 280 - 2AB Unused 2A0 - 2A7 Unused 2A8 - 2E7 Unused 2E8 - 2EF Reser v ed serial por t T able 6-11 System I/O Addresses (Continued)
Spe cificat ion s Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 6â17 I/O Address (he x) System Function (shipping configuration) 2F0 - 2F7 Unused 2F8 - 2FF Infrared por t 300 - 31F Unused 320 - 36F Unused 370 - 377 S econdar y diskette driv e controller 378 - 37F P arallel por t (LPT1/def ault) 380 - 387 U nused 388 - 38B FM synthesizerâOPL3 38C - 3AF Unused 3B0 - 3BB V GA 3BC - 3BF Reser v ed (parallel por t/no EPP suppor t) 3C0 - 3DF V GA 3E0 - 3E1 PC Card controller in CPU 3E2 - 3E3 Unused 3E8 - 3EF Inter nal modem 3F0 - 3F7 âAâ diskette controller 3F8 - 3FF Ser ial por t (COM1/def ault) CF8 - CFB PCI configuration inde x register (PCIDIV O-1) CFC - CFF PCI configuration data register (PCIDIV O-1) T able 6-11 System I/O Addresses (Continued)
6â18 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Spe cificat ion s T able 6-12 System Memory Map Size Memory Ad dress System Function 640 KB 00000000-0009FFFF Base memor y 128 KB 000A0000-000BFFFF Video memor y 48 KB 000C0000-000CBFFF Video BIOS 160 KB 000C8000-000E7FFF Unused 64 KB 000E8000-000FFFFF System BIOS 15 MB 00100000-00FFFFFF Extended memor y 58 MB 01000000-047FFFFF Super e xtended memor y 58 MB 04800000-07FFFFFF Unused 2 MB 08000000-080FFFFF Video memor y (direct access) 4 GB 08200000-FFFEFFFF Unused 64 KB FFFF0000-FFFFFFFF System BIOS
Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide Aâ1 A Sc r e w Li sting This appendix provides specif ication and reference information for the scre ws used in the computer . All screws listed in this appendix are a v ailable in the Scre w Kit, spare part number 416419-001.
Aâ2 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Scr e w Listi ng Philli ps P M3 . 0Ã3 . 0 Scr ew Locations Ta b l e A - 1 Phillips PM3.0Ã3.0 Screw Color Qty . Length Thread Head Width Black 4 3.0 mm 3.0 mm 5.0 mm Where used: 4 screws that secure the hard driv e fram e to the hard driv e (documented in Section 5.4 ) mm
Scr ew L isti ng Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide Aâ3 Phill ips P M 2 .0Ã5 .0 Capti ve Sc r e w Locations Ta b l e A - 2 Phillips PM2.0Ã5.0 Captive Screw Color Qty . Length Thread Head Width Black 4 5.0 mm 2.0 mm 5.0 mm Where used: 1 T wo scre ws that secure the hard driv e cov e r to the computer (scre ws are captured on the cov er by C clips; documented in Section 5.4 ) 2 One scre w that secures the memor y module compar tment cov er to the computer (screw is captured on th e co ver b y a C clip; documented in Section 5.7 ) 3 One scre w that secures the Bluetooth module cov er to the computer (scre w is captured on the cov er by a C clip; documented in Section 5.8 ) mm
Aâ4 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Scr e w Listi ng Phillips P M2 .5Ã13 . 0 Ca pti ve S c r e w L ocation Ta b l e A - 3 Phillips PM2.5Ã13.0 Captive Spring-Loaded Screw Color Qty . Length Thread Head Width Silv er 1 13.0 mm 2.5 mm 6.0 mm Where used: One screw that secures the hard driv e to the computer (screw is captured on the cov er by a C clip; documented in Section 5.4 ) mm
Scr ew L isti ng Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide Aâ5 T orx8 T8M2 . 5Ã4. 0 Sc r e w L ocati on Ta b l e A - 4 T orx8 T8M2.5Ã4.0 Screw Color Qty . Length Thread Head Width Black 13 4.0 mm 2.5 mm 5.0 mm Where used: One screw that secures the optical dr iv e to the computer (documented in Section 5.6 ) mm
Aâ6 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Scr e w Listi ng T orx8 T8M2 . 5Ã4. 0 Sc r e w L ocati ons Ta b l e A - 4 T orx8 T8M2.5Ã4.0 Screw (Continued) Color Qty . Length Thread Head Width Black 13 4.0 mm 2.5 mm 5.0 mm Where used: 5 screws that secure the top co ve r to the computer (documented in Section 5.19 ) mm
Scr ew L isti ng Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide Aâ7 T orx8 T8M2 . 5Ã4. 0 Sc r e w L ocati ons Ta b l e A - 4 T orx8 T8M2.5Ã4.0 Screw (Continued) Color Qty . Length Thread Head Width Black 13 4.0 mm 2.5 mm 5.0 mm Where used: 1 T wo scre ws that secure the system bo ard to the computer (documented in Section 5.21 ) 2 Three screws that secure the sys tem board fr ame to the computer (documented in Section 5.22 ) mm
Aâ8 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Scr e w Listi ng T orx8 T8M2 . 5Ã4. 0 Sc r e w L ocati ons Ta b l e A - 4 T orx8 T8M2.5Ã4.0 Screw (Continued) Color Qty . Length Thread Head Width Black 13 4.0 mm 2.5 mm 5.0 mm Where used: 2 screws that secure the USB/audio bo ard to the computer (documented in Section 5.24 ) mm
Scr ew L isti ng Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide Aâ9 Philli ps P M2 .0Ã3 .0 Sc r e w Locations Ta b l e A - 5 Phillips PM2.0Ã3.0 Screw Color Qty . Length Thread Head Width Silv er 4 3.0 mm 2.0 mm 5.0 mm Where used: 2 scre ws that secure the optical dr iv e brac k et to the optical drive (documented in Section 5.6 ) mm
Aâ10 Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide Scr e w Listi ng Phillips P M2 .0Ã3 . 0 Capti ve S cr e w Locati ons Ta b l e A - 5 Phillips PM2.0Ã3.0 Screw (Continued) Color Qty . Length Thread Head Width Silv er 4 3.0 mm 2.0 mm 5.0 mm Where used: 2 captiv e screws that secure the f an as sembly to the computer (documented in Section 5.10 ) mm
Scr ew L isti ng Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide Aâ11 Phillips P M1. 5Ã3 . 0 Scr ew L ocations Ta b l e A - 6 Phillips PM1.5Ã3.0 Screw Color Qty . Length Thread Head Width Silv er 2 3.0 mm 1.5 mm 5.0 mm Where used: 2 screws that secure the Bluetooth mo dule to the Bluetooth module co v er (documented in Section 5.8 ) mm
Aâ12 Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide Scr e w Listi ng T orx8 T8M2 .5Ã10. 0 Sc r e w L ocations Ta b l e A - 7 T orx8 T8M2.5Ã10.0 Screw Color Qty . Length Thread Head Width Black 20 10.0 mm 2.5 mm 5.0 mm Where used: 1 T wo scre ws that secure the k eyboa rd to the computer (documented in Section 5.9 ) 2 One scre w that secures the T ouchP ad to the computer (documented in Section 5.15 ) 3 F our scre ws that secure the displa y assembly to the computer (documented in Section 5.18 ) mm
Scr ew L isti ng Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide Aâ13 T orx8 T8M2 .5Ã10. 0 Sc r e w L ocations Ta b l e A - 7 T orx8 T8M2.5Ã10.0 Screw (Continued) Color Qty . Length Thread Head Width Black 20 10.0 mm 2.5 mm 5.0 mm Where used: 2 screws that secure the displa y assemb ly to the computer (documented in Section 5.18 ) mm
Aâ14 Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide Scr e w Listi ng T orx8 T8M2 .5Ã10. 0 Sc r e w L ocations Ta b l e A - 7 T orx8 T8M2.5Ã10.0 Screw (Continued) Color Qty . Length Thread Head Width Black 20 10.0 mm 2.5 mm 5.0 mm Where used: 11 screws that secure the top co v er to the computer (documented in Section 5.19 ) mm
Scr ew L isti ng Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide Aâ15 Phillips P M2 .5Ã7 . 0 Ca pti v e Sc r e w L ocations Ta b l e A - 8 Phillips PM2.5Ã7.0 Captive Screw Color Qty . Length Thread Head Width Silv er 2 7.0 mm 2.5 mm 5.0 mm Where used: 2 captiv e screws that secure the f an as sembly to the computer (documented in Section 5.10 ) mm
Aâ16 Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide Scr e w Listi ng Phillips P M2 .0Ã8. 0 Capti ve Sc r ew L ocations Ta b l e A - 9 Phillips PM2.0Ã8.0 Captive Screw Color Qty . Length Thread Head Width Silv er 4 8.0 mm 2.0 mm 5.0 mm Where used: 4 captiv e screws that secu re the heat sink to the computer (documented in Section 5.11 ) mm
Scr ew L isti ng Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide Aâ17 Phillips P M2 .0Ã4. 0 Scr e w Locati ons T able A-10 Phillips PM2.0Ã4.0 Screw Color Qty . Length Thread Head Width Silv er 2 4.0 mm 2.0 mm 5.0 mm Where used: 2 screws that secure the Mini Card mo dule to the computer (documented in Section 5.16 ) mm
Aâ18 Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide Scr e w Listi ng Philli ps P M2 .0Ã2 . 0 Scr ew Locations T able A-11 Phillips PM2.0Ã2.0 Screw Color Qty . Length Thread Head Width Black 5 2.0 mm 2.0 mm 5.0 mm Where used: 3 screws that secure the s witch co v er to the computer (documented in Section 5.17 ) mm
Scr ew L isti ng Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide Aâ19 Philli ps P M2 .0Ã2 . 0 Scr ew Locations T able A-11 Phillips PM2.0Ã2.0 Screw (Continued) Color Qty . Length Thread Head Width Black 5 2.0 mm 2.0 mm 5.0 mm Where used: 2 screws that secure the displa y asse mbly to the computer (documented in Section 5.18 ) mm
Aâ20 Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide Scr e w Listi ng Phillips P M2 .5Ã4. 0 Scr e w L ocations T able A-12 Phillips PM2.5Ã4.0 Screw Color Qty . Length Thread Head Width Black 2 4.0 mm 2.5 mm 5.0 mm Where used: 2 screws that secure the modem modu le to the computer (documented in Section 5.20 ) mm
Scr ew L isti ng Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide Aâ21 He x HM5 .0Ã12 . 0 Sc r ew L ock L ocatio ns T able A-13 Hex HM5.0Ã12.0 Scre w Lock Color Qty . Length Thread Head Width Silv er 4 12.0 mm 5.0 mm 5.0 mm Where used: 1 T wo scre w loc ks that secure the system board to the computer (documented in Section 5.21 ) 2 T wo scre w loc ks that secure the system board frame to the computer (documented in Section 5.22 ) mm
Aâ2 2 Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide Scr e w Listi ng T orx8 T8M2 . 5Ã6 . 0 Sc r e w Locations T able A-14 T orx8 T8M2.5Ã6.0 Screw Color Qty . Length Thread Head Width Black 4 6.0 mm 2.5 mm 5.0 mm Where used: 4 screws that secure the thermal pl ate to the computer (documented in Section 5.10 ) mm
Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide Bâ1 B Soft w are B ac k u p and Rec o v er y Back up HP Backup and Recov ery Manager provides se veral w ays to back up the system and to recov er optimal system functionality . â HP installed dri v ers, utilities, a nd applications can be copied to a CD or to a D VD using HP Backup and Recov ery Manager . â Formatted D VD±R W discs and D VD±R W double-layer discs are not compatible with HP Backup and Recov ery Manager . â The computer must be connected to external po wer before you perform backup and recov ery procedures. Safeguarding Y our Da ta T o safeguard your documents, store personal f iles in the My Documents folder and periodically create a backup copy of the folder .
Bâ2 Maintenance and Se rvi ce Guide So ftwar e Bac k up and R eco v ery B ac kin g Up t he S y stem Using HP Backup and Restore Manager , you can â Back up specif ic files and folders. â Back up the entire system. â Back up modif ications since your last backup, using HP system restore points. â Schedule backups. Ba c king Up S pec ific Files or F o lders Y ou can back up specif ic files or folders to the hard dri ve, to an optional external hard dri ve, or to discs. â This process will take se veral minutes, depending on the f ile size and the speed of the computer . T o back up specific f iles or folders: 1. Select Start > All Pr ograms > HP Backup & Recovery > HP Backup and Recov ery Manager . 2. Click Next. 3. Click Back up to protect system settings and important data f iles , and then click Next . 4. Click Back up individual f iles and folders , and then click Next . The Backup W izard opens. 5. Click Next. 6. Click Backup selected f iles fr om most common locations (Recommended) . â or â Click Advanced Backup (Experienced users) to access adv anced f iltering techniques. 7. Click Next. 8. Follo w the on-screen instructions.
So ft w ar e Back up and R ecov er y Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide Bâ3 B ac king U p t he En tire Hard Driv e When you perform a complete backup of the hard dri v e, you are sa ving the full factory image, including the W indo ws operating system, software applications, and all personal f iles and folders. â A copy of the entire hard dri ve image can be stored on another hard dri ve, on a netw ork dri v e, or on recov ery discs that you create. â This process may take o v er an hour , depending on your computer speed and the amount of data being stored. T o back up your entire hard driv e: 1. Select Start > All Pr ograms > HP Backup & Recovery > HP Backup and Recov ery Manager . 2. Click Next. 3. Click Back up to protect system settings and important data f iles , and then click Next . 4. Click Back up entire hard dri ve , and then click Next . The âBack up entire hard diskâ page opens. 5. Click Next. 6. Select the location for the backup f iles, and then click Next . 7. Select the Protect data access with passw ord check box, and type your password in the Passw ord and Conf irm boxes. â This step is optional. If you do not want to password-protect your data access, clear the Protect data access with passw ord check box. 8. Click Next. 9. Follo w the on-screen instructions.
Bâ4 Maintenance and Se rvi ce Guide So ftwar e Bac k up and R eco v ery Ba c king U p Modifications M ad e to th e Sys t e m When you back up modif ications since your last backup, you are creating system recov ery points. This allows you to sa v e a snapshot of your hard dri v e at a specific point in time. Y ou can then recov er back to that point if you want to re verse subsequent changes made to your system. â The f irst system recov ery point, a snapshot of the entire image, is automatically created the f irst time you perform a backup. Subsequent recov ery points mak e a copy of changes made after that time. HP recommends that you create recov ery points â Before you add or extensi vely modify softw are or hardware. â Periodically , whene ver the system is performing optimally . â Recov ering to an earlier reco very point does not af fect data f iles or e-mails created since that recov e ry point. After you create a recov ery point, you are prompted to schedule subsequent recov ery points. Y ou can schedule recov ery points for a specif ic time or e vent in your system. T o create and schedule a system recovery point: 1. Select Start > All Pr ograms > HP Backup & Recovery > HP Backup and Recov ery Manager . 2. Click Next. 3. Click Back up to protect system settings and important data f iles , and then click Next . 4. Click Create or manage Reco very P oints , and then click Next . The âRecov ery Point Managerâ page opens. 5. Follo w the on-screen instructions.
So ft w ar e Back up and R ecov er y Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide Bâ5 Sc heduling Ba c k ups T o schedule backups: 1. Select Start > All Pr ograms > HP Backup & Recovery > HP Backup Scheduler . The âBackup Schedulerâ page opens. 2. Click Next. 3. Schedule system recov ery points at specific interv als (no w , daily , weekly , or monthly) or at specific e vents, such as at system start or when you dock to an optional docking station (select models only), by clicking one of the a vailable options. Click Next to further defi ne the settings. A summary of your system recov ery point settings is displayed. 4. Follo w the on-screen instructions. Rec o ver y HP Backup and Recov ery Manager analyzes the hard driv e and creates a dedicated hard dri v e rec ov ery partition on the hard dri v e large enough to store a cop y of the full factory image. Y ou can choose whether you want to store that cop y on the recov ery partition, on another dri v e, or on external reco v ery discs. â Before using HP Backup and Recov ery Manager , try repairing the system by running Microsoft W indows System Restore. For more information, select Start > Help and Support , and then search for âSystem Restore. â
Bâ6 Maintenance and Se rvi ce Guide So ftwar e Bac k up and R eco v ery HP Backup and Recov ery Manager allows you to â Cr eate reco very discs (highly r ecommended). The recov ery discs are used to start up your computer and to recov er the full factory image (operating system and software) in case of system f ailure or instability . â If you do not ha ve a CD or D VD burner , a copy of the entire hard dri ve image can be stored on another hard dri ve or on a network dri ve. â P erf orm a r ecov ery . Y ou can perform a full system recovery or recov er important files from the reco very partition on the hard dri ve, from another dri ve, or from reco very discs that you create. Creating Reco v er y Disc s (Hi ghly R ecommen ded) After setting up the computer for the f irst time, you can create a set of recov ery discs of the full factory image, using Recov ery Media Creator in the HP Backup and Recov ery Manager . The recov ery discs are used to start up (boot) the computer and recov er the operating system and software to factory settings in case of system failure or instability . Ã CA UTION: After y ou cr eate the r eco v ery discs, y ou can incr ease the amount of a v ailable space on the har d dri v e b y deleting the r e co v ery partition . Ho we v er , doing this is n o t r ecommended . If y ou delete this partition , y ou w ill los e an y info rmati on that is on the partition . â Only one set of recov ery discs can be created for this computer .
So ft w ar e Back up and R ecov er y Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide Bâ7 Before creating recov ery discs: â Obtain high-quality CD-R, D VD-R, or D VD R media, purchased separately . â Formatted D VD±R W discs and D VD±R W double-layer discs are not compatible with HP Backup and Recov ery Manager . â Number each disc before inserti ng it into the optical dri v e of the computer . â If necessary , you can cancel Recov ery Media Creator before you ha ve f inished creating the recov ery discs. The next time you open Recov ery Media Creator , you will be prompted to continue the disc creation process where you left of f. T o create a set of recovery discs: 1. Select Start > All Pr ograms > HP Backup & Recovery > HP Backup and Recov ery Manager . 2. Click Next. 3. Click Create factory softwar e recov ery CDs or D VDs to r ecover the system (Highly r ecommended) , and then click Next . The âRecov ery Media Creatorâ page opens. 4. Click Next. 5. Click Write to CD/D VD , and then click Next . 6. Follo w the on-screen instructions. Pe r f o r m i n g a R e c o ve r y P er forming a Reco v er y from the Reco v er y Dis cs T o perform a recovery from the reco very discs: 1. Back up all personal f iles. 2. Insert the f irst recov ery disc into the optical dri ve and restart the computer . 3. Follo w the on-screen instructions.
Bâ8 Maintenance and Se rvi ce Guide So ftwar e Bac k up and R eco v ery P erforming a Reco very from t he H ard Driv e There are 2 ways to initiate a reco v ery from the hard dri ve: â From within W indo ws. â From the recov ery partition. Initia ting a Reco v er y in Win do ws T o initiate a recovery in W indows: 1. Back up all personal f iles. 2. Select Start > All Pr ograms > HP Backup & Recovery > HP Backup and Recov ery Manager . 3. Click Next. 4. Click Recov er important f iles or the entir e system , and then click Next . 5. Click a recov ery option, and then click Next . â If you choose to recov er the system, the computer restarts and recov ery begins. 6. Follo w the on-screen instructions. Initia ting a Reco very from th e Hard Driv e Reco v er y P artition T o initiate a recovery from the hard dri ve reco very partition: 1. Back up all personal f iles. 2. Restart the computer , and then press f11 before the W indow s operating system loads. 3. Click a recov ery option, and then click Next . 4. Follo w the on-screen instructions.
Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide Câ1 C Dis pl a y Com pon ent Rec y c lin g à W ARN ING: The bac klight contains mer cury . Cauti on should be e xe r c ised w hen re mov ing and handling the backligh t to a vo id damaging this component and ca using e xposur e to the merc ur y . à CA UTION: The pr ocedure s in this appendi x can r esult in damage to displa y components . T he only components int ended fo r r ecy cling purpo ses ar e the liquid c r y stal displa y (L CD) panel and the backlight . Car eful handling should be e x er c ised w hen r emo v ing these components . â Materials Disposal This HP product contains mercury in the backlight in the display assembly that might require special handling at end-of-life. Disposal of mercury may be regulated because of en vironmental considerations. For disposal or rec ycling information, contact your local authorities or the Electronic Industries Alliance (EIA) at http://www .eiae.org .
Câ2 Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide Display C omponent R ecy cling This appendix provides disassembl y instructions for the display assembly . The display assembly must be disassembled to gain access to the backlight 1 and the liquid crystal display (LCD) panel 2. â Disassembly procedures dif fer from one display assembly to another . The procedures provided in this appendix are general disassembly instructions. Specif ic details, such as scre w sizes, quantities, and locations, and co mponent shapes and sizes, can v ary from one computer model to another .
Displa y Componen t Rec y cling Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide Câ3 Perform the follo wing steps to disassemble the display assembly: 1. Remov e all screw co vers 1 and scre ws 2 that secure the display bezel to the display assembly . R emo v ing the Displa y Bez el Sc re w Co v er s and Sc r e w s
Câ4 Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide Display C omponent R ecy cling 2. Lift up and out on the left and right inside edges 1 and the top and bottom inside edges 2 of the display bezel until the bezel disengages fro m the display assembly . 3. Remov e the display bezel 3 . R emo v ing the Displa y Bez el
Displa y Componen t Rec y cling Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide Câ5 4. Disconnect all display panel cables 1 from the display in verter and remo v e the in verter 2 . R emo v ing the Displa y Inv er ter
Câ6 Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide Display C omponent R ecy cling 5. Remov e all screws 1 that secure the display panel assembly to the display enclosure. 6. Remov e the display panel assembly 2 from the display enclosure. R emo v ing the Displa y P a nel As sembl y
Displa y Componen t Rec y cling Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide Câ7 7. T urn the display panel assembly upside do wn. 8. Remov e all screws that secure the display panel frame to the display panel. R emo v ing the Displa y P a nel F r ame s
Câ8 Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide Display C omponent R ecy cling 9. Use a sharp-edged tool to cut the tape 1 that secures the sides of the display panel to the display panel frame. 10. Remov e the display panel frame 2 from the display panel. R emo v ing the Displa y F r ame
Displa y Componen t Rec y cling Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide Câ9 11. Remov e the screws 1 that secure the backlight co ver to the display panel. 12. Lift the top edge of the backlight cov er 2 and swing it forward. 13. Remov e the backlight cover . R emo v ing the Bac klight C o v er
Câ10 Main tenance and Se rvi ce Guide Display C omponent R ecy cling 14. T urn the display panel right side up. 15. Remov e the backlight cables 1 from the clip 2 in the display panel. R eleasing the Bac kligh t Cable s
Displa y Componen t Rec y cling Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide Câ11 16. T urn the display panel upside do wn. 17. Remov e the backlight frame from the display panel. R emo v ing the Bac klight F r ame
Câ12 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Display C omponent R ecy cling à W ARN ING: The bac klight contains mer cury . Cauti on should be e xe r c ised w hen re mov ing and handling the backligh t to a vo id damaging this component and ca using e xposur e to the merc ur y . 18. Slide the backlight out of the backlight frame. R emo v ing the Bac klight
Displa y Componen t Rec y cling Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide Câ13 19. Disconnect the display cable 1 from the LCD panel. 20. Remov e the screws 2 that secure the LCD panel to the display rear panel. 21. Release the LCD panel 3 from the display rear panel. 22. Release the tape 4 that secures the LCD panel to the display rear panel. R eleasing the L CD P anel
Câ14 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Display C omponent R ecy cling 23. Remov e the LCD panel. R emo v ing the L CD P anel 24. Recycle the LCD panel and backlight.
Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide Dâ1 D Co nnec tor P in As signm en ts Ta b l e D - 1 A udio-Out (Headphone) Pin Signal Pin Signal 1 A udio out, left channel 3 Ground 2 A udio out, ri ght channel
Dâ2 Maintenance and Se rvi ce Guide Connec tor P in Assignments Ta b l e D - 2 A udio-In (Micr ophone) Pin Signal Pin Signal 1 A udio signal in 3 Ground 2 A udio signal in Ta b l e D - 3 Universal Serial Bus Pin Signal Pin Signal 1 5 VDC 3 Data 2 Data â 4 Ground
Connec tor P in Assignments Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide Dâ3 Ta b l e D - 4 S-Video-Out Pin Signal Pin Signal 1 S-VHS color (C) signal 5 TV -CD 2 Composite video signal 6 S-VHS intensity ground 3 S-VHS intensity (Y) signal 7 Composite video ground 4 S-VHS color ground
Dâ4 Maintenance and Se rvi ce Guide Connec tor P in Assignments Ta b l e D - 5 External Monitor Pin Signal Pin Signal 1 Red analog 9 5 VDC 2 Green analog 10 Ground 3 Blue analog 11 Monitor detect 4 Not connected 12 DDC 2B data 5 Ground 13 Horizontal sync 6 Ground analog 14 V er tical sync 7 Ground analog 15 DDC 2B clock 8 Ground analog
Connec tor P in Assignments Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide Dâ5 Ta b l e D - 6 RJ-11 (Modem) Pin Signal Pin Signal 1 Unused 4 Unused 2T i p 5U n u s e d 3 Ring 6 Unused
Dâ6 Maintenance and Se rvi ce Guide Connec tor P in Assignments Ta b l e D - 7 RJ-45 (Netw ork) Pin Signal Pin Signal 1 T ransmit 5 Un used 2 T ransmit â 6 Receiv e â 3 Receive 7 Unused 4 Unused 8 Unused
Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide Eâ1 E P o w er C ord Set Requirem ents 3-Con duc tor P o w er Cord Set The wide range input feature of the computer permits it to operate from any line v oltage from 100 to 120 or 220 to 240 volts A C. The po wer cord set included with the computer meets the requirements for use in the country where the equipment is purchased. Po wer cord sets for use in other countries must meet the requirements of the country where the computer is used.
Eâ2 Maintenance and Se rvic e Guide P ow er Cor d Set Requirements Gen eral R equiremen ts The requirements listed belo w are applicable to all countries. â The length of the po wer cord set must be at least 1.5 m (5.0 ft) and a maximum of 2.0 m (6.5 ft). â All po wer cord sets must be approv ed by an acceptable accredited agency responsible for e v aluation in the country where the po wer cord set will be used. â The po wer cord sets must ha ve a minimum current capacity of 10 amps and a nominal v oltage rating of 125 or 250 V A C, as required by each countryâ s po wer system. â The appliance coupler must meet the mechanical conf iguration of an EN 60 320/IEC 320 Standard Sheet C13 connector for mating with the ap pliance inlet on the back of the computer .
P ow er Co rd Set R equirements Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide Eâ3 Coun tr y-Spec ific Requirements 3-Conductor P ower Cor d Set Requirements Country/Region Accredited Ag ency Applicable Note Number A ustralia EANSW 1 Au s t r i a OVE 1 Belgium C EBC 1 Canada CSA 2 Denmark DEMK O 1 Finland FIMK O 1 F rance UTE 1 Ger many VDE 1 Italy IMQ 1 Jap a n ME T I 3 â NOTES: 1. The fle xible cord m ust be <HAR> T ype HO5VV -F , 3-conductor , 1.0 mm² conductor size . P ower cord set fittings (appliance coupler and w all plug) must bear the cer tification mark of the agency responsible f or ev aluation in the countr y where it will be used. 2. The fle xible cord m ust be T ype SPT -3 or equivalent, No . 18 A WG, 3-conductor . The wall plug must be a two-pole grounding type with a NEMA 5-15P (15 A, 125 V) or NEMA 6-15P (15 A, 250 V) configuration. 3. The appliance coupler , fle xible cord, and wall plug mu st bear a âTâ mar k and registration number in accordance with the J apanese Dentor i La w . The fle xib le cord must be T ype VCT or VCTF , 3-conductor , 1.00 mm² conductor size . The wall plug m ust be a two-po le grounding type with a J apanese Industrial Standard C8303 (7 A, 125 V) configuration.
Eâ4 Maintenance and Se rvic e Guide P ow er Cor d Set Requirements Ko r e a E K 4 The Netherlands KEMA 1 Norwa y NEMK O 1 P eopleâ s Republic of China CCC 5 Sweden SEMK O 1 Switzerland SEV 1 T aiwan BSMI 4 United Kingdom BSI 1 United States UL 2 â NOTES: 1. The fle xible cord m ust be <HAR> T ype HO5VV -F , 3-conductor , 1.0 mm² conductor size . P ower cord set fittings (appliance coupler and w all plug) must bear the cer tification mark of the agency responsible f or ev aluation in the countr y where it will be used. 2. The fle xible cord m ust be T ype SPT -3 or equivalent, No . 18 A WG, 3-conductor . The wall plug must be a two-pole grounding type with a NEMA 5-15P (15 A, 125 V) or NEMA 6-15P (15 A, 250 V) configuration. 3. The appliance coupler , fle xible cord, and wall plug mu st bear a âTâ mar k and registration number in accordance with the J apanese Dentor i La w . The fle xib le cord must be T ype VCT or VCTF , 3-conductor , 1.00 mm² conductor size . The wall plug m ust be a two-po le grounding type with a J apanese Industrial Standard C8303 (7 A, 125 V) configuration. 4. The fle xible cord m ust be T ype R VV , 3-conductor , 0.75 mm² conductor size . P ower cord set fittings (appliance co upler and w all plug) must bear the cer tification mar k of the agency resp onsible f or ev aluation in the countr y where it will be used. 5. The fle xible cord m ust be T ype VC TF , 3-conductor , 0.75 mm² conductor size . P ower cord set fittings (appliance coupler and w all plug) must bear the cer tification mar k of the agency respon sible f or e valuation in the country where it will be used. 3-Conductor P ower Cor d Set Requirements (Continued) Country/Region Accredited Ag ency Applicable Note Number
Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide Inde xâ1 In de x 1394 port 1â11 A AC adapter, spare part number 3â20 , 3â30 accessory battery connector 1â19 arrow keys 1â13 audio troubleshooting 2â21 audio-in jack location 1â8 pin assignments Dâ2 audio-out jack location 1â8 pin assignments Dâ1 B base enclosure, spare part number 3â13, 3â26 battery removal 5â5 spare part number 3â15, 3â22 , 5â5 battery bay 1â9 , 1â19 battery light 1â7 battery release latch 1â19 Bluetooth module removal 5â16 spare part number 3â13, 3â23 , 5â16 Bluetooth module cable, disconnecting 5â16 Bluetooth module cover illustrated 3â17 removal 5â16 bottom components 1â18 C cables, service considerations 4â2 caps lock key 1â13 caps lock light 1â15 carrying case, spare part number 3â20, 3â22 CMOS clearing 1â4 components bottom 1â18 front 1â6 keyboard 1â9, 1â12 left-side 1â10 rear 1â10 right-side 1â8 top 1â14 , 1â16
Inde xâ2 Main tenance and Serv ice Gui de Inde x computer feet illustrated 3â17 locations 5â10 Computer Setup Advanced Menu 2â4 Main Menu 2â2 overview 2â1 Security Menu 2â3 Tools Menu 2â4 computer specifications 6â1 connector pin assignments audio-in Dâ2 audio-out Dâ1 external monitor Dâ4 headphone Dâ1 microphone Dâ2 modem Dâ5 monitor Dâ4 network Dâ6 RJ-11 Dâ5 RJ-45 Dâ6 S-Video-out Dâ3 Universal Serial Bus (USB) Dâ2 connectors, service considerations 4â2 D design overview 1â20 Digital Media Slot 1â11 disassembly sequence chart 5â3 diskette drive OS loading problems 2â19 precautions 4â3 display assembly removal 5â45 spare part numbers 3â3, 3â27 , 5â45 display component recycling Câ1 display lid switch 1â17 display release button 1â7 docking connector 1â19 drive light 1â7 drives, preventing damage 4â3 DVD/CD-RW Combo Drive OS loading problems 2â20 precautions 4â3 removal 5â11 spare part number 3â13, 3â19 , 3â20 , 3â22 , 3â25 , 5â11 specifications 6â9 DVD±RW and CD-RW Combo Drive OS loading problems 2â20 precautions 4â3 removal 5â11 spare part number 3â13, 3â19 , 3â20 , 3â23 , 3â25 , 5â11 specifications 6â7 DVD-ROM drive OS loading problems 2â20 precautions 4â3 removal 5â11 spare part number 3â13, 3â19 , 3â20 , 3â22 , 3â25 , 5â11 specifications 6â11
Inde x Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide Inde xâ3 E electrostatic discharge 4â4, 4â8 exhaust vents 1â11 expansion product spare part number 3â20, 3â25 troubleshooting 2â14 external monitor port location 1â9 pin assignments Dâ4 External MultiBay II power cable and stand, spare part number 3â20, 3â22 External MultiBay II, spare part number 3â20, 3â22 F f1 to f12 keys 1â13 fan assembly removal 5â23 spare part number 3â7, 3â26 , 5â23 features 1â2 feet illustrated 3â17 locations 5â10 fingerprint reader 1â17 fingerprint reader board, spare part number 3â7 , 3â26 , 5â49 flowcharts, troubleshooting no audio 2â21, 2â22 no network/modem connection 2â26 no OS loading 2â15 no OS loading from diskette drive 2â19 no OS loading from hard drive 2â16, 2â17, 2â18 no OS loading from optical drive 2â20 no power 2â8, 2â10, 2â11 no video 2â12, 2â13 nonfunctioning device 2â23 nonfunctioning docking device 2â14 nonfunctioning keyboard 2â24 nonfunctioning pointing device 2â25 fn key 1â13 front components 1â6 G grounding equipment and methods 4â7 H hard drive OS loading problems 2â16 precautions 4â3 removal 5â6 spare part numbers 3â15, 3â19 , 3â20 , 3â23 , 3â25 , 3â27 , 3â30 , 5â6 specifications 6â6 hard drive bay 1â19 hard drive cover illustrated 3â17 removal 5â7 hard drive frame, removal 5â9
Inde xâ4 Main tenance and Serv ice Gui de Inde x headphone jack location 1â8 pin assignments Dâ1 heat sink removal 5â28 spare part number 3â7, 3â26 , 5â28 HP Docking Station, spare part number 3â20, 3â25 HP Extended Life Battery, spare part number 3â20, 3â22 I I/O address specifications 6â15 Info Center button 1â15 interrupt specifications 6â13 K keyboard removal 5â18 spare part numbers 3â3, 3â5 , 3â27 , 3â28 , 3â29 , 5â18 troubleshooting 2â24 keyboard components 1â9, 1â12 keypad keys 1â13 L left-side components 1â10 M mass storage devices, spare part numbers 3â18 memory map specifications 6â18 memory module removal 5â13, 5â33 spare part numbers 3â13, 3â25 , 3â26 , 3â30 , 5â13 , 5â33 memory module compartment 1â19 memory module compartment cover illustrated 3â17 removal 5â14 microphone 1â8 microphone jack location 1â8 pin assignments Dâ2 Mini Card module removal 5â39 spare part numbers 3â9, 3â11 , 3â23 , 3â24 , 3â25 , 5â39 Miscellaneous Plastics Kit (for use with docking device), spare part number 3â20, 3â23 modem cable, removal 5â64 modem jack location 1â10 pin assignments Dâ5 modem module removal 5â53 spare part number 3â13, 3â25 , 5â53 troubleshooting 2â26 monitor port location 1â9 pin assignments Dâ4
Inde x Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide Inde xâ5 N network jack location 1â10 pin assignments Dâ6 network, troubleshooting 2â26 nonfunctioning device, troubleshooting 2â14, 2â23 num lock key 1â13 num lock light 1â15 O optical drive location 1â8 OS loading problems 2â20 precautions 4â3 removal 5â11 spare part numbers 3â13, 3â19 , 3â20 , 3â22 , 3â25 , 5â11 specifications 6â7, 6â9, 6â11 optical drive bracket, removal 5â12 P packing precautions 4â5 password clearing 1â4 PC Card slot 1â11 PC Card slot bezel, illustrated 3â17 plastic parts 4â2 Plastics Kit contents 3â17 spare part number 3â7, 3â17 , 3â29 pointing device, troubleshooting 2â25 pointing stick 1â17 pointing stick buttons 1â17 pointing stick cable, disconnecting 5â22 power button 1â15 power connector 1â9 power cord set requirements Eâ2 spare part numbers 3â21, 3â22 power light 1â6 power management features 1â5 power, troubleshooting 2â8 presentation button 1â15 processor removal 5â31 spare part numbers 3â7, 3â25 , 5â31 R rear components 1â10 removal/replacement preliminaries 4â1 procedures 5â1 right-side components 1â8 RJ-11 jack location 1â10 pin assignments Dâ5 RJ-45 jack location 1â10 pin assignments Dâ6 RTC battery, removal 5â35 S Screw Kit, spare part number 3â21 , 3â29 , Aâ1
Inde xâ6 Main tenance and Serv ice Gui de Inde x security cable slot 1â10 serial connector module removal 5â65 spare part number 3â13, 3â26 , 5â65 serial number 3â1, 5â2 serial port 1â8 service considerations 4â2 smart card slot 1â11 speakers 1â17 specifications computer 6â1 DVD/CD-RW Combo Drive 6â9 DVD±RW and CD-RW Combo Drive 6â7 DVD-ROM drive 6â11 hard drive 6â6 I/O addresses 6â15 interrupts 6â13 memory map 6â18 optical drive 6â7, 6â9, 6â11 system DMA 6â12 static shielding materials 4â8 stringent security 1â4 S-Video-out jack location 1â10 pin assignments Dâ3 switch cover removal 5â42 spare part numbers 3â3, 3â26 , 5â42 system board removal 5â55 spare part number 3â13, 3â26 , 5â55 system board frame removal 5â62 spare part number 3â13, 3â26 , 5â62 system DMA 6â12 system memory map 6â18 T thermal paste, replacing 5â25 , 5â27 , 5â30 thermal plate removal 5â26 spare part number 3â7 , 3â26 tools required 4â1 top components 1â14, 1â16 top cover removal 5â49 spare part numbers 3â7, 3â26 , 3â30 , 5â49 TouchPad 1â17 removal 5â36 spare part numbers 3â5, 3â23 , 5â36 TouchPad cable, disconnecting 5â38 TouchPad left/right buttons 1â17 TouchPad scroll zone 1â17 transporting precautions 4â5 troubleshooting audio 2â21 Computer Setup 2â1 expansion product 2â14
Inde x Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide Inde xâ7 flowcharts 2â5 keyboard 2â24 modem 2â26 network 2â26 nonfunctioning device 2â14 , 2â23 OS loading 2â15 overview 2â1 pointing device 2â25 power 2â8 video 2â12 U Universal Serial Bus (USB) port location 1â8, 1â11 pin assignments Dâ2 unknown password 1â4 USB diskette drive, spare part number 3â20, 3â22 USB/audio board removal 5â67 spare part number 3â13, 3â26 , 5â67 V vents 1â19 video troubleshooting 2â12 volume buttons 1â15 W Windows applications key 1â13 Windows logo key 1â13 wireless button 1â15 wireless light 1â6, 1â15 workstation precautions 4â6